JP2019103939A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of performing voice output with consideration of an interest of a player.SOLUTION: When a double ready-to-win is displayed, a voice lamp control device 114 outputs a probability variation ready-to-win voice corresponding to a ready-to-win pattern which established a probability variation ready-to-win upon reception of a probability variation pattern ready-to-win display command. In addition, for 20 milli seconds since a start of output of the probability variation ready-to-win voice, a display command from a display control device 114 is ignored. Therefore, on the voice lamp control device 114, a normal ready-to-win voice is not output by the ready-to-win display command which is received later. Therefore, when the double ready-to-win is displayed on a third pattern display device 81, only the probability variation ready-to-win voice can be listened by a player.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 39

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, various effects images such as fluctuation effects are displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game.

JP 2008-272159 A

  However, in conventional gaming machines, audio output has not necessarily been performed in consideration of the player's interest in the effect image displayed on the display device.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of performing voice output in consideration of the interest of the player.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises a main control means for performing main control of a game, a sub control means for performing control based on a control signal from the main control means, and its sub control means And display means for performing variational effects accompanied by dynamic display of identification information, and voice output means for outputting a voice, wherein the identification information is predetermined by the variational effects performed by the display means A predetermined gaming value is given to the player when the stop display is performed in the mode, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode are provided as the effect mode of the fluctuation effect performed by the display means. And the third effect mode simultaneously indicating the first effect mode and the second effect mode, wherein the change effect is selected by the display means as the sound outputted by the sound output means. A place to be performed in one of the staging modes And the second sound output when the variable effect is performed in the second effect mode in the display unit, and the sub control unit And display control means for controlling the display on the display means, and audio control means for controlling the output of audio on the audio output means, the display control means for controlling the display contents on the display means by the audio control means. In the case where the display means is provided with the notification means for notifying to the display means, and the notification means performs the change effect in the third effect mode, the second effect mode is first displayed as the display content in the display means. The voice control means is notified, and then the first effect mode is notified to the voice control means, and the voice control means displays the display content in the display means notified by the notification means. Based on the output control means that selects the voice to be output and starts the output, and the notification means receives the notification when the second effect mode is notified as the display content on the display means from the notification means The predetermined period includes the non-accepting means for setting only the notification of the first effect mode from the notifying means and the notification of the second effect mode to the non-accepting state.

  A gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the main control means for performing main control of the game, the sub control means for performing control based on the control signal from the main control means, and movement of the identification information by control of the sub control means. In the case where the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode by the change effect performed by the display means, the display means performing the change effect with the dynamic display and the voice output means for outputting the voice The game player is given a predetermined game value, and the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the first effect mode are provided as the effect mode of the variable effect performed by the display means. And the third effect mode simultaneously indicating the second effect mode, and the change effect is performed in the first effect mode by the display means as the sound output by the sound output means The first voice to be output The second sound output when the variable effect is performed in the second effect mode by the display means, and the sub control means controls the display in the display means A display control means, and a voice control means for controlling the output of voice in the voice output means, the display control means comprising a notification means for notifying the voice control means of the display content in the display means; The notification means first notifies the voice control means of the second effect mode as the display content of the display means when the display means performs the variation effect in the third effect mode. The first effect mode is notified to the voice control means, and the voice control means is a sound to be output based on the display content in the display means notified by the notification means. When the second effect mode is notified as the display content on the display means by the output control means that selects an output and starts outputting, the notification is received for a predetermined period after the notification is received. Since the non-accepting means for making only the notification of the first effect mode and the notification of the second effect mode from the means in the non-accepting state is provided, it is possible to perform voice output in consideration of the player's interest It has the effect of

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the display screen and effective line setting of the third symbol display device, and (b) shows the display screen of the third symbol display device when double reach is established. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing various data stored in the RAM in the main control device, and (b) schematically shows various data stored in the ROM in the main control device. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters of a main control apparatus, various holding ball storage areas, and various holding ball execution areas. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot random number table, (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table, (c) is a fluctuation pattern table table for jackpot (D) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the outlier (ordinary) fluctuation pattern table, and (e) is a diagram schematically showing the outlier (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table. Are schematically shown. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing various data stored in the ROM in the audio lamp control device, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing a probability change reach voice and a normal reach voice And (c) is a schematic view schematically showing various data stored in the RAM in the audio lamp control device. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing the player to "turn left", and (b) is a hitting to instruct the player to "turn right". It is a schematic diagram which showed the direction indication screen typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the display data table for fluctuation. It is the figure which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the through gate passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main command determination processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation indication processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the right hitting left hitting determination processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the right hitting left hitting determination processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is an explanatory view showing a relation of passage of a ball of the 1st through gate 67, and display of a batting direction indication screen which instructs a right strike, when a game state is in a definite or changing time, (a), It is a figure showing an example when a ball passes only two spheres in the 1st through gate 67 in 10 seconds, and (b) is a sphere passing the 1st through gate 67 at least 3 spheres in 10 seconds. It is the figure which showed the example in the case of having been. It is the flowchart which showed the audio | voice reproduction setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is an explanatory view for explaining reproduction of reach voice when double reach is displayed in the 3rd design display device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the audio | voice reproduction setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining reproduction of reach voice when double reach is displayed in the third symbol display device, (b) is single reach of probability change reach in the third symbol display device It is an explanatory view for explaining reproduction of reach voice in the case where it is displayed. It is the flowchart which showed the audio | voice reproduction setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining reproduction of reach voice when double reach is displayed in the 3rd design display device. It is the model which showed typically the various data stored in RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the audio | voice reproduction setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is an explanatory view for explaining reproduction of reach voice when double reach is displayed in the 3rd design display device. It is the model which showed typically the various data stored in RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the audio | voice reproduction setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 30, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. Balls are played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The player can change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or change the content of the effect of super reach, for example, by the player. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and along with entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 described later (start start winning combination) The various effects such as the change effect and the reach effect to be performed are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. For example, a "sea stage" with a motif in the shallow sea, a "palace stage" with a submarine palace as a motif, and a "deep sea stage" with a deep sea motif are prepared as stages. The change of the stage is performed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the change effect is not performed or during high-speed change.

  Further, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach during the normal reach when the normal reach effect is started, and when the normal reach is developed to the super reach. If the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2), and the like can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, the so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player for driving a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Sensor 51a, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electric resistance (Not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is then driven to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, and rails 61, 62, The general winning opening 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the first through gate 67, the second through gate 670, the variable display unit 80 And the like, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is disposed in the through hole and fixed by a wood screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by dividing two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 into a substantially circular area (a winning opening etc. is disposed, and a shot ball is (Flowing down area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. On the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), a rubber return 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  Two first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are disposed on the upper right side of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37A is provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Aa as light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37Ab. Similarly, the other first symbol display device 37B is also provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Ba as light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37Bb.

  The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B perform display according to each control performed by the main control device 110, and display of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly performed. In the present embodiment, these first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. It is done. Specifically, when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, while when the ball wins the second ball entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  Each of the plurality of LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a steady state or not or in a short time or in a normal state by a lighted state, or indicates by a lighted state whether or not it is fluctuating. It indicates whether the symbol corresponding to the jackpot or the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot or the outlier symbol is displayed by the lighting state, or indicates the number of holding balls by the lighting state. Each of the 7-segment display devices 37Ab and 37Bb displays the number of rounds in a big hit and an error display. In addition, LED37Aa and 37Ba are comprised so that the luminescent color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, and may suggest the various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with few LED by the combination of the luminescent color. it can.

  Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when there is a ball entry to the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the jackpot is successful (jump lottery), and when it is determined that the jackpot is made, the jackpot type is also determined. As jackpot types determined here, 15R probability variation jackpots, 4R probability variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. The LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown.

  Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 round jackpots, and "4R probability variation jackpot" is a maximum number of round jackpots with 4 rounds It is a probability change jackpot to shift to a high probability state after. Also, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after jackpots of 15 rounds and for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation numbers) becomes a short time state. is there.

  Also, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (during a definite change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special gaming state The state of The high probability state (during a definite change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entry port 640 by increasing the hitting probability of the second symbol described later. The term "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of change is not positive, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that of probability change. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased with the jackpot probability unchanged, and the second entry ball opening It refers to the state of the game where it is easy for the ball to enter 640. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normally medium is the state of the game which is neither a definite change nor a time reduction (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is increased).

  Although the details will be described later, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, but also the time during which the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is released, during a definite change or during a time change A long time is set in comparison with. When the motorized part 640a is in the open state (opened state), the ball enters the second entrance 640 compared to the case where the motorized part 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to ball. Therefore, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entry port 640 during definite change or time, and it is possible to increase the number of times the jackpot lottery is performed.

  In addition, in addition to changing the opening time of the motorized symbol 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time during a definite change or during a short time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the motorized accessory 640a is opened more than during normal operation. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol does not change during definite changes or during a short time, and the electric symbol 640a is open during the time and one hit when the electric symbol 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during definite period of time or during a short time, the time when the motorized symbol 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is opened or the number of times the motorized symbol 640a is opened at one time is not the second symbol Only the hit probability may be changed to be increased relative to the normal.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is triggered by the ball entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 (start winning) as a trigger while being synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. 3 The third symbol display device 81 configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display of symbols, and the passage of the spheres of the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 trigger the third A second symbol display device 83 configured of an LED that variably displays two symbols is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 described later, for example, the upper, middle and lower three symbol rows Is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling these third symbols for each symbol row It is supposed to be. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. It makes a decorative display according to it. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a view for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 4 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the display screen and the effective line setting of the third symbol display device 81. And FIG.4 (b) is the figure which showed the display screen of 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 at the time of what is called double reach being materialized.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed over substantially the entire area of the screen. In the lower center of the main display area Dm, of the spheres entered into the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, the number of balls that have not been changed yet (retention ball) is reserved A reserve display area Db for displaying the number of balls is provided.

  The third symbol displayed in the main display area Dm is 10 types of main symbols consisting of 10 types of character symbols (turtle, shark, dugong, angelfish, etc.) corresponding to the numbers “0” to “9”, It is constituted by one kind of sub-pattern (in the present embodiment, a pattern of shellfish) formed smaller than this main pattern. These main symbols and sub symbols constitute symbol rows by arranging the main symbols in ascending or descending order of the numbers and arranging the sub symbols between the main symbols.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is detected, a big hit lottery is performed, and the third symbol is combined with the variable display in the first symbol display device 37 (LED 37a) In the display device 81, the variation display (variation effect) of the third symbol is executed. The variation effect is performed such that the main symbol and the sub symbol periodically (rightwardly scroll) scroll from right to left (in the direction of the arrow X) for each symbol row with periodicity. In addition, as shown in FIG. 4, at the time of this horizontal scroll, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper, middle, and lower are displayed on each symbol row. In this case, in the upper symbol row Z1, the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower pattern row Z3, the numbers in the main symbol are arranged in ascending order. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is displayed in three stages of left, middle and right for each symbol row (Z1 to Z3). . Therefore, a total of nine third symbols in three rows and three columns are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, five effective lines are set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4A, five lines of the left line L1, the middle line L2, the right line L3, the upper right line L4, and the upper left line L5 are set as effective lines.

  In pachinko machine 10, at the time of the stop of the fluctuation production which scrolls to the side at the time of every game, if the combination (for example, the combination of the same main symbol) of the jackpot symbols is aligned on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, the jackpot As a big hit animation is displayed.

  That is, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 to be described later is a big hit, the fluctuation display (variation effect) in which the same main symbol is aligned on any of the activated lines L1 to L5 is performed, and the fluctuation effect is over After that, it is configured to generate a big hit. In the case of transition to a high probability state (probable variation state) after the big hit end (in the case of a positive variation big hit), a variation effect is performed in which main symbols (corresponding to “probable variation symbols”) corresponding to odd numbers are aligned. On the other hand, when transitioning to a low probability state after the big hit (in the case of a big hit), a fluctuation effect is performed in which main symbols (corresponding to "normal symbols") corresponding to even numbers are aligned.

  The stop of the fluctuation effect is performed in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower pattern row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2. Then, when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed, the same main symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. If it has been, a screen notifying that effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as "reach establishment", and a voice notifying the reach is provided to the pachinko machine 10 as an audio output device 226 (see FIG. 5) Output from). Here, "reach" represents a state in which a jackpot may occur due to the symbols stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 when the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed.

  Further, as described above, in the upper symbol row Z1, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is arranged so that the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row appear in descending order, and in the lower figure handle row Z3, the numbers of the main symbol are Because they are arranged to appear in ascending order, as shown in FIG. 4 (b), when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower figure symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed, the left and middle in the respective symbol rows Z1 and Z3 -The arrangement of the 3rd symbol on the right may be reversed. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 4 (b), in the upper symbol row Z1, the main symbols (jugong), sub-symbols (shellfish), and the main symbols (shark) of "6" are arranged in order from the left The main pattern (shark) of "6", sub-pattern (shellfish), and the main pattern (jugong) of "7" are arranged in order from the left in the lower-row pattern row Z1, and the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower-pattern row Z3. And, the arrangement of the third pattern is reversed.

  In this case, when middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, if the middle symbol of middle symbol row Z2 is the main symbol (shark) of "6", the main symbol of "6" on effective line L4 ( Sharks), that is, main symbols corresponding to even symbols are aligned, so they are usually jackpots, transition to a low probability state after the jackpot ends, and become a time-saving state. On the other hand, if the middle symbol of middle symbol row Z2 is the main symbol (Jugon) of "7", the main symbol (Jugon) of "7" on effective line L5, that is, the main symbol corresponding to odd symbols Since the oddly variable design is aligned, it becomes a oddly variable jackpot and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot is over. That is, the state shown in FIG. 4 (b) may be a big hit on the two effective lines L4 and L5, and the symbol stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 usually makes a big hit as well as a big hit State, that is, a "double reach" state in which two reach are established.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, double reach can be established in the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81. By establishing this double reach, a mere single reach (at the stage when the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower figure pattern row Z3 are stopped and displayed, a reach showing the possibility of a big hit on only one effective line) is shown. In comparison, it is possible to make the player more likely to win a jackpot. In addition, it is possible to make the player have a more complicated emotion, such as whether it will be a jackpot, a jackpot, or a jackpot or a jackpot usually. Thus, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

  The reserved display area Db is an area for displaying the number of balls held, which is the number of balls (held balls) whose variation has not been executed, among the balls entered at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. It is. When the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B), The number of ball landings is suspended up to four times for entering the first ball entrance 64 and is also suspended up to four times for entering the second ball entrance 640. The total value of the number of holding balls in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and also indicated in the holding display area Db.

  In the reserve display area Db, one reserve ball number symbol (● symbol in FIGS. 4A and 4B) is displayed per one reserve ball number, and according to the displayed number of the reserve ball number symbol, the reserve ball number The number of balls is displayed. That is, when one holding ball number symbol is displayed in the holding display area Db, it indicates that the holding ball number is one ball, and when eight holding ball number symbols are displayed, the holding ball number is displayed. Indicates that it is 8 balls. In addition, when the holding ball number design is not displayed in the holding display area Db, it indicates that the number of holding balls is 0, that is, there is no holding ball.

  In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first entry slot 64 is configured to be suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of balls reserved is not limited to four times, and is three times The number of times may be set to five or more (for example, eight times). Similarly, when entering the second entrance 640, the maximum number of holding balls is not limited to four, and is set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). You may. In addition, the maximum number of holding balls for entering the first ball entrance 64 and the maximum number of holding balls for entering the second ball entrance 640 are not limited to the same number and are different. It may be set to the number of times. For example, the maximum number of holding balls for entering the first ball entrance 64 may be set to four, and the maximum number of holding balls for entering the second ball entrance 640 may be set to two.

  In addition, instead of the display of the number-of-hold ball number symbol in the hold display area Db, the number of number-of-hold ball is divided into a number of parts of the third symbol display device 81 or one or more areas divided by the number of hold ball number It may be displayed in different modes (for example, colors and lighting patterns). Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls held may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with eight holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which corresponds to the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 takes a predetermined time for the symbol “o” and the symbol “x” as a display symbol (second symbol) every time the ball passes the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670. It is a variable display that lights up alternately. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, in the second symbol display device 83, after the variation display of the second symbol, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, in the second symbol display device 83, the symbol “x” is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o"), the motorized role object 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is It is configured to be activated (opened) only for a predetermined time.

  The time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the definite change and during the short time, it is possible to perform the winning lottery more frequently than in the middle. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities for the motorized role 640 a of the second entrance 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 during definite variation and during time saving.

  In addition, the second ball exit 640 during positive or negative time by other methods such as increasing the probability of hitting, increasing the opening time and opening frequency of the motorized symbol 640a per hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter during the definite change or during the short time than during the normal time, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, and a single hit The opening time and the number of times of opening of the motorized role product 640a with respect to may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the ball flowing down the game board on the left side is configured to be passable. ing. Further, the second through gate 670 is assembled to the game board on the right of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired to the game board, a part of the ball flowing down the right of the game board can pass through It is configured. When the ball passes the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670, a lottery for winning the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed by the second symbol display device 83, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out If there is, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes through the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol hold lamp Also in 84, it is lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol display device 37 and the third symbol other than the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment. It may be performed using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 is not limited to four times, and may be three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times) It may be set to Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be configured not to perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 through which a ball can enter is disposed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a jackpot, and the display corresponding to the result of the drawing is shown by the LED 37Aa of the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side in a front view of the variable display unit 80, a second entrance port 640 where a ball can enter is disposed. When the ball enters the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. A lottery for a jackpot is made by the main control device 110, and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B.

  Further, each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is also one of the winning openings through which five balls are paid out as a winning ball when the ball is hit. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second entrance 640 The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are the same, though configured the same. For example, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the first entrance 64 is three, and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the sphere enters the second entrance 640 is five. You may

  The second ball entrance 640 is accompanied by a motorized role 640 a. The motorized accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally, the motorized accessory 640a is in a closed state (shrinkage state), and it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640. On the other hand, when the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the fluctuation display of the second symbol performed triggered by the passage of the ball to the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670, The motorized role object 640 a is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is likely to enter the second ball entry port 640.

  As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal condition, and the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is short as compared to the normal, and therefore, in the variable display of the second symbol The symbol of “” becomes easy to be displayed, and the number of times that the motorized role piece 640 a is in the open state (enlarged state) is increased. Furthermore, during definite period of time and short time, the time when the motorized accessory 640a is opened is also longer than usual. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entry port 640 compared to the normal time during definite variation and time.

  Here, although the details will be described later, the probability of becoming a big hit is a low probability state when the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the ball enters the second entrance 640. Even if there is a high probability state, it is the same. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of jackpot is that the ball entered the first entrance 64 in the case where the ball entered the second entrance 640 It is set higher than the case. On the other hand, the first ball entry port 64 does not have a motorized part like the second ball entry port 640, and the ball can enter the ball at all times.

  Therefore, during the normal operation, the motorized accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory is entered. Aim the ball 64 so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 toward the mouth 64 (so-called "left-handed"), and entering the first entrance 64 has many chances for a big hit lottery It is advantageous for the player to obtain and aim to be a big hit. On the other hand, during the definite change or time, the motorized accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in the open state and the second entrance 640 is likely to enter the ball, so to the second entrance 640 Direct the ball so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and entering the second entrance 640 aims to become a 15R positive variation hit jackpot Is advantageous to the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment emits a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the process of being changed, time is short, or is normal). You can change the way of “right-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  Below the first ball entrance 64, a first variable winning device 65 is disposed, and at a substantially central portion thereof, a horizontally-long rectangular specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 becomes the jackpot, after the predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed, the first stop symbol for the jackpot is selected. The LED 37Aa of the symbol display device 37A is turned on, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  Further, a second variable winning device 650 is disposed below the second entry port 640, and a horizontally-long rectangular specified winning opening (large opening) 650a is provided substantially at the center of the second variable winning device 650. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 becomes a jackpot, after the predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed, the first stop pattern of the jackpot While making LED37Ba of the symbol display device 37B light, the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the big hit is shown. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 650a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  Each of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a, 650a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are on the front side with the horizontally long rectangular opening and closing plate covering the specified winning opening 65a or the specified winning opening 650a, and the lower side of the opening and closing plate as an axis. It has all the large open mouth solenoids (not shown) for opening and closing drive. The specific winning opening 65a, 650a is normally in a closed state where the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. The special winning opening 65a, 650a is provided with a large opening opening which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, 650a in the game area, and the LED 37Aa, LED37Ba corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is lit. It is opened for a predetermined time, and while the specific winning opening 65a, 650a is open, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a, 650a is triggered by the ball winning in the specific winning opening 65a, 650a. A game state opened for a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special game state for a time.

  In the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate, an identification label and the like are provided, and the certificate paper and the like affixed to the adhesive space K1 is a front frame 14 Can be viewed through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball which has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a is guided to the ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device 83 Run.

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  Here, various data stored in the RAM 203 and the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. 6 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 203, and FIG. 6 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing various data stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (a), the RAM 203 has a special drawing 1 holding ball storage area 203a, a special drawing 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a special drawing holding ball execution area 203c, a special drawing 1 holding ball number counter 203d, and a special drawing 2 Holding ball counter 203e, general drawing holding ball number counter 203f, general drawing 1 holding ball number counter 203g, general drawing holding ball number counter 203h, general drawing holding ball storage area 203i, general drawing holding ball execution area 203j, special drawing type flag It has at least 203 k.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, the ROM 202 at least includes a big hit random number table 202a, a big hit type table 202b, a big hit variation pattern table 202c 202c, and a release variation pattern table 202d 202d.

  Furthermore, in the main control device 110, main components of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery described above, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83. In order to execute the process, the RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 7) for storing various counters.

  Here, referring to FIGS. 7 and 8, various counters provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110, various tables 202a to 202d stored in ROM 202, and various storage balls stored in RAM 203 The areas 203a, 203b, 203i and the various holding ball execution areas 203c, 203j will be described. First, FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters. These counters etc. are MPU201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform a big hit lottery, the setting of the display of the 1st symbol display 37 and the 3rd symbol display 81, the lottery of the display result of the 2nd symbol display 83, etc. Used in

  For the setting of the display of the big hit lottery and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the big hit lottery, and the first hit type counter C2 used for selecting the big hit symbol A stop pattern selection counter C3, a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1 are used. The second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time updating is performed, and the value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14), and some counters are periodically updated in the main processing (see FIG. 21) The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The counter buffer is an area for storing the value of each updated counter, and the MPU 201 uses the value stored in the counter buffer at the update timing of the counter for each counter, and uses the value of the counter. Make an update.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899), and then reached 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 899). It is configured to return to. When the first random number counter C1 is updated by one round (when the update is periodically performed from an initial value, the initial value is returned to the initial value by the next update), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time Is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the first random number counter C1 is updated from the newly read initial value.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 21).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once in each timer interrupt processing). And although the details will be described later, the value of the first random number counter C1 at that time is provided in the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) at the first entry ball slot 64. It is stored in any of the first to fourth areas of reserved special drawing 1 reserved. In addition, at the timing when the ball wins at the second entry ball opening 640 (start winning), the value of the first random number counter C1 at that time is provided in the special figure 2 reserve ball storage area 203b. It is stored in any of the first to fourth areas.

  The value of the jackpot random number is set by the jackpot random number table 202a (FIG. 6 (b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device. The first hit random number stored in the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special view second holding ball storage area 203b at the timing when the ball hits the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning) If the value of the counter C1 matches the value of the jackpot random number (jackpot random number value) set by the jackpot random number table 202a, the MPU 201 determines that the jackpot is a jackpot.

  Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8A is a schematic view showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number table 202a is divided into two types, one for the low probability state (not in the state of probability change) and the one for the high probability state (state in the state of probability change). The number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. By varying the number of jackpot random numbers, the jackpot probability is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In this first random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (large hit random number values) that will be a big hit in the low probability state is 3, and the big hit random numbers “7, 307, 582” are “low in the gaming state”. It is stored in the jackpot random number table 202 a in association with the “probability state”.

  On the other hand, the number of jackpot random number values in the high probability state is 30, and the jackpot random number values “28, 58, 85, 122, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448 , 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "are associated with the" high probability state "of the" playing state ", the jackpot It is stored in the random number table 202a.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot random number value associated with the “low probability state” and the jackpot random number value associated with the “high probability state” in the jackpot random number table 202 a In order not to, each big hit random number value is set. If there is a value that is a jackpot random value regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, the value is likely to be predicted from the outside, so there is a possibility that the possibility of illegally winning a jackpot may increase. As in the present embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number is predicted by changing the value of the jackpot random number according to the situation (that is, according to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state). Since it can be made hard to do, it can aim at control over fraud.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. The first collision type counter C2 is for determining the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (for example, 0 to 99) In the case of a counter that can take a value, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). For example, the value of the first collision type counter C2 is periodically updated (once in each timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment). Then, at the timing when the ball wins at the first ball entry 64 (start winning), the value of the first hit type counter C2 at that time is the first hit with the value of the random number counter C1, and the special figure 1 storage ball storage of the RAM 203 is stored. It is stored in the reserved area of one of the first to fourth special area 1 reserved areas provided in the area 203a. In addition, at the timing when the ball wins at the second entry ball opening 640 (start winning), the value of the first hit type counter C2 at that time is the first hit with the value of the random number counter C1, It is stored in the reserved area of one of the first to fourth special area 2 reserve areas provided in the area 203b.

  Here, the reserve area of 1 in the special figure 1 reserve sphere storage area 203b or the special figure 2 reserve sphere storage area 203c (special figure 1 reserve first to fourth area, special figure 2 reserve first to fourth area If the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in?) Is not a large random number, that is, if it is a random number falling out, the variation pattern in the variation effect, the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type" Is called the one at the time of disconnection. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the reserve area of 1 in the special figure 1 reserve sphere storage area 203b or the special figure 2 reserve sphere storage area 203c is a random number that makes a big win, The fluctuation pattern and the type of stop will be at the time of big hit. In this case, the variation pattern and the stop type at the time of the big hit are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

  The value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first collision type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b (FIG. 6B) stored in the ROM 202. Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 8 (b). FIG. 8B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot type table 202b. As shown in FIG. 8B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot type is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  As the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds transitions to a high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot “15R probability variation jackpot”, the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot and 100 During the number of times of fluctuation, there are "15R normal jackpots" which are time-saving state, and there is "4R probability variation jackpot" in which the maximum round number shifts to high probability state after 4 rounds of jackpots.

  In the jackpot type table 202b, the correspondence between the jackpot type and the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 when the result of the jackpot lottery performed based on the winning of the first entrance 64 is a jackpot, and the second ball entry The correspondence between the jackpot type when the result of the jackpot lottery performed based on the winning of the mouth 640 is the jackpot and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is separately defined.

  In the example of FIG. 8 (b), as a result of the jackpot lottery performed based on the winning of the first entrance 64 as the correspondence between the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot and the value of the first hit type counter C2, It is specified as follows as a jackpot classification table for the first ball entrance. That is, the value "0 to 24" of the first type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variation jackpot, the value "25 to 49" of the first type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal jackpot, The value "50 to 99" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 4R probability variation jackpot. That is, when it becomes a big hit with the winning a prize in the first entrance 64, the type of big hit becomes a 15R probability variation jackpot with a probability of 1⁄4 (= 25/100), 1⁄4 (= 25/100) The probability of) becomes 15R normal jackpot, and 1/2 (= 50/100) becomes 4R probability variation jackpot.

  On the other hand, as the correspondence between the jackpot type when the result of the jackpot lottery performed based on the winning of the second entrance ball slot 640 is the jackpot and the value of the first hit type counter C2, for "second ball entrance" It defines as a big hit classification table of as follows. That is, the value "0 to 24" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 4R probability variation jackpot, the value "25 to 49" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal jackpot, The value "50 to 99" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variation jackpot. That is, if the jackpot is to be a big hit along with the second entrance ball entry 640, the jackpot type is a 15R probability variation jackpot with a probability of 1/2 (= 50/100), 1/4 (= 25/100) The probability of) becomes 15R normal jackpot, and 1/4 (= 25/100) becomes 4R probability variation jackpot.

  Thus, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of jackpot is that the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 in the case where the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 It is set higher than the case of the ball. On the other hand, as described above, the second ball entry port 640 is accompanied by the motorized role object 640a, and the ease with which the ball enters the second ball entry port 640 according to the open / close state of the motorized role object 640a is In contrast to the change, the first ball entrance 64 does not have a motorized part like the second ball entrance 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always enter the ball.

  Therefore, in many cases, the motorized accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the motorized entry is performed. Aim the ball 64 so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 toward the mouth 64 (so-called "left-handed"), and entering the first entrance 64 has many chances for a big hit lottery It is advantageous for the player to obtain and aim to be a big hit. On the other hand, during the definite change or time, the motorized accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in the open state and the second entrance 640 is likely to enter the ball, so to the second entrance 640 Direct the ball so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and entering the second entrance 640 aims to become a 15R positive variation hit jackpot Is advantageous to the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment emits a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the process of being changed, time is short, or is normal). You can change the way of “right-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type displayed at the third symbol display device 81 at the time of detachment, and after reach is generated, the final stop symbol shifts by only one before and after the reach symbol. Three stops of "reach out of back and forth" and "stop out of reach other than out of back and forth" in which the final stop design stops other than back and forth of reach design after reach similarly occurs. Effects) pattern is selected.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt processing). Then, at the timing when the ball wins at the first ball entry 64 (start winning), the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time is the first hit with the value of the random number counter C1, and the special figure 1 holding ball storage area of the RAM 203 It is stored in the reserved area of one of the first to fourth special area 1 reserved areas provided in 203a. In addition, at the timing when the ball wins at the second entry ball opening 640 (start winning), the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time is the first hit with the value of the random number counter C1, It is stored in the reserved area of any of the first to fourth special area 2 areas provided in 203b.

  1 in the special figure 1 reserve ball storage area 203b or 1 in the special figure 2 reserve ball storage area 203c (any one of the special figure 1 reserve first to fourth area, special figure 2 reserve first to fourth area) If the stored value of the first random number counter C1 is not a big hit random number, the stop type is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area as the stop type at the time of disconnection. Ru.

  A plurality of tables (not shown) having different ranges of random numbers for which the stop type is selected are provided in the ROM 202 corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state or the low probability state.

  For example, in a high probability state, a table with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely out" is selected so that reach effects are not selected more than necessary because jackpots are easily generated. It becomes easy to be selected as "complete removal". In this table, "longitudinal outreach" narrows to 98, 99 and "non back and forth out of reach" also narrows to 90 to 97, making "front and back out of reach" and "reach other than back and forth out of reach" difficult to select. In the low probability state, a table with a narrow range of random numbers from 0 to 79 corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is selected to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first entrance 64. And it becomes difficult to select "completely out". In this table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than back and forth deviation" is wide as 80 to 97, and "reach other than back and forth deviation" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach display with a long rendering time, so it is possible to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first ball entrance 64 and the fluctuation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear outreach” is set to 98, 99.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is a counter used for determining the fluctuation pattern, and is incremented by one in order, for example, within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 21).

  Then, at the timing at which the ball wins at the first entrance 64 (start winning), the value of the variation type counter CS1 at that time is the first hit with the value of the random number counter C1, and the special view 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 It is stored in the reserved area of one of the first to fourth special area 1 areas provided in the area. In addition, at the timing when the ball wins at the second entry ball opening 640 (start winning), the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 at that time is the first hit with the value of the random number counter C1, and the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 It is stored in the reserved area of one of the first to fourth special area 2 areas provided in the above.

  The MPU 201 determines fluctuation patterns such as so-called normal reach, super reach, special reach, etc., from the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation pattern tables 202bc and 203d (FIG. 7B) stored in the ROM 202. Specifically, the determination of the variation pattern is the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, and the reach type or the fine symbol of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Determine the variation mode.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202c used at the time of jackpot and a deviation fluctuation pattern table 202d used at the time of detachment are prepared as fluctuation pattern tables. Further, as the variation pattern table 202d for removal, the variation pattern table 202d1 for removal (normal) and the variation are made according to whether the gaming state is a normal medium low probability state excluding time and space, or time and space or definite change. A (probable) variation pattern table 202d2 is prepared.

  Here, the reserve area of 1 in the special figure 1 reserve sphere storage area 203b or the special figure 2 reserve sphere storage area 203c (special figure 1 reserve first to fourth area, special figure 2 reserve first to fourth area If the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the?) Is a random number that makes a big hit, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reserve area is from the variation pattern table 202c for big hit It is determined.

  In addition, special drawing 1 reservation sphere storage area 203b or 1 reservation area in special figure 2 reservation sphere storage area 203c (special figure 1 reservation 1st-4th area, special figure 2 reservation 1st-4th area) If the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the) is not a jackpot random number, that is, if it is a random number falling out, when the gaming state is in a normal medium low probability state excluding time and place, If the stop pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the same hold area as the first random number counter C1 is determined from the out-of-order (ordinary) fluctuation pattern and the gaming state is in the middle of a hour A stop pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the same reserve area as the first random number counter C1 is determined from the out-of-order (probable change) change pattern.

  FIG. 8C is a view schematically showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern table 202c stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. Among the variation patterns selected in the case of the jackpot, there are various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, and various special reach, and among these variation patterns, variation patterns (variation time (variation time) according to the value of variation type counter CS1 Is selected.

  Here, the various types of Norleech are fluctuation patterns whose fluctuation time is as short as 30 seconds, and are the fluctuation patterns in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after a short reach (so-called, the symbols are aligned with a blind stop) . Super reach variety is a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds and longer than normal reach variety, and the first symbol (or third symbol) after a relatively long reach (for example, a reach that develops from long reach or normal reach) Variation pattern). Special reach is a variation pattern that is longer than 90 seconds, and the variation time is 90 seconds, and the longest reach (for example, reach from super reach or reach from normal reach is super reach) This is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after different special reach etc.).

  In addition, "reach various" means that there are many things that effect contents differ also in each reach, for example, in the super reach, the reach which changes the back image rapidly and is displayed, and a certain character There is a reach to be displayed suddenly, etc. In addition to that, there are multiple reach with different effects, such as the one to which a notice effect before the start of fluctuation is added, and the one to which a jackpot effect by re-change is added.

  As shown in FIG. 8C, also in the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202c, the gaming state is normal, and the time is short, as in the out-use fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 8D and 8E). Alternatively, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is made different during the definite variation.

  Specifically, when the gaming state is normal, the correspondence between each fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 to 50 for normal reach, 51 to 179 for super reach, and 180 for special reach. It is ~ 198. On the other hand, when the gaming state is in the middle or in the middle of a short game, the variation patterns and the value of the variation type counter CS1 are 0 to 149 for various types of normal reach and 150 to 198 for various types of super reach.

  In the jackpot variation pattern table 202c shown in FIG. 8C, various super reach varieties and special reach varieties having long variation times are easily selected as variation patterns when the gaming state is normal. On the other hand, when the gaming state is in a short time or in a definite change, various types of normal reach with a short change time are easily selected as a change pattern.

  During normal time, since the probability of becoming a big hit is low, various types of Super Reach and Special Reach types with long fluctuation times are selected as fluctuation patterns, and while fluctuation effects are being performed by various Super Reach types and Special Reach types. The player's expectation of becoming a big hit can be greatly expanded. On the other hand, during the time saving or during a definite change, the motorized role product 640a is likely to be in the open state, and the start winning at the second ball entry port 640 is likely to occur. Therefore, if many fluctuation patterns with a long fluctuation time are selected during time saving or during a definite change, it may take time until the start of the next fluctuation presentation, giving the player a wait state, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. There is. In addition, it is not preferable because the operation rate decreases as a hole. Therefore, when the gaming state is in the middle of a short time or in a certain change, it is configured that various types of normal reach with a shorter fluctuation time are more easily selected than in the normal case, and the next variable display is started early. Can reduce the possibility of giving discomfort to people. In addition, it is possible to suppress an extreme decrease in the operating rate.

  Further, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202c shown in FIG. 8C, various special reach are not selected when the gaming state is in the middle of a short time or in the middle of a definite change. Although the details will be described later, various special reach options are not selected in the case of a release. That is, when the fluctuation effect is performed by the special reach, it means that it becomes 100% jackpot. Here, since the game state in which the player always wins the jackpot during the odd change, if the change effect is performed by the special reach during the false change, the change effect is ended earlier than the jackpot joy And I want you to be strongly dissatisfied with wanting to shift to the special gaming state (big hit state). In the pachinko machine 10, since no special reach variation effect is performed in the middle of a short time or during a definite change, such player's dissatisfaction can be avoided.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 correspond to each other when the gaming state is in the middle or the middle of the game, but each variation also varies between the middle and the middle The correspondence between the pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 may be made different. For example, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202c may be defined so that various special reach types are selected as fluctuation patterns during time saving. Since it is not always promised that a big hit will be made during a short time, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of becoming a big hit by performing the fluctuation presentation by the special reach.

  Further, although the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, it may be configured to be determined using a plurality of other fluctuation type counters. For example, it may be determined by another fluctuation type counter whether or not to add a notice effect for giving notice of the start of a jackpot or reach effect before the start of a change or during a change effect, or when reach is established, The number of first symbols (or third symbols) to be stopped may be determined by shifting the number of symbols and stopping (for example, one symbol offset or the like).

  FIG. 8D is a view schematically showing an example of the out-of-order (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8 (d), the outlier (ordinary) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 is completely outlier only, which is referred to when the completely outset is determined as the outstop type at the time of outlier, and the back and forth out of reach and back and forth out It is divided into groups (groups) based on reach common which is referred to when the non-reach is determined and the stop type at the time of out-of-range, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 corresponds to each of the divided groups It is attached. 1 in the special figure 1 reserve ball storage area 203b or 1 in the special figure 2 reserve ball storage area 203c (any one of the special figure 1 reserve first to fourth area, special figure 2 reserve first to fourth area) If the stored value of the first random number counter C1 is not a large random number, that is, if it is an out-of-order random number, when the gaming state is in a normal medium low probability state excluding time and space, the first According to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area as the random number counter C1, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the hold area is out It is determined from the (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

  There are short deviations in which the change ends in a short time (7 seconds) and reach is not established, and long deviations that are longer than the short deviation (10 seconds) but in which the reach is not established. As for the correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the short deviation is 0 to 98, and the long deviation is 99 to 198. There are also common reach types in which reach is established but the variation time is short as 30 seconds, and super reach types where the variation time is 60 seconds longer than the normal reach types, so the correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 As for the attachment, the normal reach variety is 0 to 149, and the super reach variety is 150 to 198.

  FIG. 8E is a view schematically showing an example of the deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8E, the out-of-order (probable-error) change pattern table 202d2 is referred to when the complete out-of-stop type is determined as in the case of the out-of-state (outside) (normal) change pattern table 202d1. It is referred to when the out-of-front and out-of-front reach and out-of-front outreach are determined, such as complete out-of-front and out-of-front reach, etc. It is divided into groups (groups) based on the stop type, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

  1 in the special figure 1 reserve ball storage area 203b or 1 in the special figure 2 reserve ball storage area 203c (any one of the special figure 1 reserve first to fourth area, special figure 2 reserve first to fourth area) If the stored value of the first random number counter C1 is not a jackpot random number, that is, if it is an out-of-order random number, the same hold area if the gaming state is a time saving state or a high probability state at a definite change In accordance with the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved area is from the deviation (probable change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 It is determined.

  The correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the complete deviation exclusive use is 0 to 190 for short deviation and 191 to 198 for long deviation. Further, the correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in common reach is 0 to 190 for various types of normal reach and 191 to 198 for various types of super reach.

  Since the game pattern is referred to when the game state is in the middle or in the middle of a game change, the electric role object 640a is likely to be in the open state, and the start winning prize at the second entrance 640 is obtained Is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible for the player to wait for the start of the next variable display, giving a player a feeling of discomfort, if the long play is frequently performed while the time is short or during a certain change. There is sex. In addition, it is not preferable because the operation rate decreases as a hole. Therefore, when the gaming state is a short time state or a high probability state at the time of definite variation, the short gap is configured to be more easily selected than in the other cases, and the game is started by performing the next variable display early. Can reduce the possibility of giving discomfort to people. In addition, it is possible to suppress an extreme decrease in the operating rate.

  Also, in the out-of-order (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 and out-of-order (probable fluctuation) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 that are referred to in the case of out-of-focus, various special reach types that can be selected as fluctuation patterns in the case of a big hit are not selected. As a result, when the fluctuation effect by special reach is performed, it becomes 100% jackpot. Further, even in the case of the jackpot, the special reach is selected as the variation pattern only when the gaming state is medium, and the probability of being selected is also as low as 10/199. Therefore, the special reach can make the player feel as a special change effect, and when the change effect by the special reach is performed, it is possible to give the player great pleasure.

  Although the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is selected using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, a plurality of fluctuation type counters may be used in combination (selection of presence / absence of advance notice, etc. may be selected). Also, although the selection of the outlier type is divided into the outlier (ordinary) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 and the outlier (probable change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2, a plurality of holding balls are present even when the gaming state is normal. (For example, in the case of the maximum of four, three or more), the variable display may be ended early, so that it may be selected by referring to the out-of-order (probable change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. It may be configured to prepare a fluctuation pattern table for normal use or probability change corresponding to the number of holding balls.

  Furthermore, in the fluctuation pattern tables for each deviation shown in FIGS. 8 (d) and 8 (e), short deviation and long deviation are simply referred to as deviation, and when the deviation is selected, another table is referred to. The short deviation and the long deviation may be selected with a predetermined probability. Of course, also in this case, a table corresponding to the number of holding balls may be prepared.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the explanation of the various counters will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is a counter used for a random lottery of the second symbol (normal symbol) fluctuation display performed in the second symbol display device 83, and for example, one by one is sequentially added within the range of 0 to 250 And is configured as a loop counter that returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie 250). In the case where the second random number counter C4 makes one rotation (when an update is periodically performed from an initial value, the initial value is returned to the initial value by the next update), the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time Is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4.

  In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and it is detected that the ball has passed the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670. It is acquired and stored in any of the first to fourth areas of the general drawing reservation of the common drawing reservation ball storage area 203i provided in the RAM 203.

  In the second random number counter C4, the number of random numbers for which the game state is normal is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. That is, when the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is in the range of "5 to 153", it is determined to be a hit if the gaming state is in the normal state, and the second symbol display device 83 stops the symbol The symbol “o” is lighted and displayed as 2 symbols), and the electric role piece 640 a of the second ball entry port 640 is opened for a predetermined time. In addition, the number of random numbers to be hit when the gaming state is short or constant is 250, and the range is “1 to 250”. That is, when the value of the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is in the range of "1 to 250", it is determined to be a hit if the gaming state is in the middle of a hour or during a definite change, and the second symbol display device 83 is stopped. While the symbol of "o" is lit and displayed as the symbol (the second symbol), the electric role part 640a of the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time longer than that in the normal state.

  In this way, the probability of hitting the second pattern is set to be higher than that during normal change during and after a definite change. Also, as described above, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is also shorter than that in the normal, so the symbol of "o" becomes easy to be displayed in the variable display of the second symbol, and the motorized role piece 640a is in the open state ( Increase the number of times). On the other hand, the time during which the motorized accessory 640a is opened during the definite change and during the short time also becomes longer than the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entry port 640 compared to the normal time during definite variation and time.

  Here, as described above, even if the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the probability of becoming a big hit is a low probability state. The same is true even in the high probability state, but the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of jackpot is the first entrance when the ball enters the second entrance 640 It is set higher than when the ball enters 64. On the other hand, the first ball entry port 64 does not have a motorized part like the second ball entry port 640, and the ball can enter the ball at all times.

  Therefore, in many cases, the motorized accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the motorized entry is performed. Aim the ball 64 so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 toward the mouth 64 (so-called "left-handed"), and entering the first entrance 64 has many chances for a big hit lottery It is advantageous for the player to obtain and aim to be a big hit. On the other hand, during the definite change or time, the motorized accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in the open state and the second entrance 640 is likely to enter the ball, so to the second entrance 640 Direct the ball so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and entering the second entrance 640 aims to become a 15R positive variation hit jackpot Is advantageous to the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment emits a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the process of being changed, time is short, or is normal). You can change the way of “right-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14). And is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 21).

  By the way, special figure 1 reservation sphere storing which consists of four reserve areas (special figure 1 reserve 1st-4th area) where each counter value is stored in RAM203 to the ball entering to the 1st ball entrance 63 An area 203a is provided. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b in which each counter value is stored for entering a ball into the second ball entrance 64. Although not shown, the special drawing 2 holding ball storage area 203b also has four holding areas (the special drawing 2 holding first to fourth areas) in the same manner as the special drawing 1 holding ball storage area 203a. .

  Each of the reserve areas provided in the special figure 1 reserve ball storage area 203a is a first random number counter acquired from the counter buffer by entering the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640. A first random number counter storage area 203a1, a first collision type counter storage area 203a2, a fluctuation pattern selection counter for storing values of C1, first collision type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1 respectively A storage area 203a3 and a variation type counter storage area 203a4 are provided. Also, although not shown, any reservation area provided in the special figure 2 reservation ball storage area 203b is similar to each reserve area of the special figure 1 reservation ball storage area 203a, the first random number counter C1, A storage area is provided for storing the values of the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1, respectively.

  To the special ball 1 holding ball storage area 203a, according to the ball entering timing to the first ball entrance 64, the first hit random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection Each value of the counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is stored. At this time, if there is no hold in the special figure 1 hold ball storage area 203a and all the special view 1 hold first to fourth areas are vacant areas, the special view 1 first hold area The value is stored. If there is only one hold in the special figure 1 reserve ball storage area 203a and the value of each counter is stored only in the special figure 1 reserve first area, the value of each counter in the special figure 1 reserve second area Store.

  When there are two reservations in the special figure 1 reservation ball storage area 203a, and the values of the respective counters are stored only in the special figure 1 reservation first and second areas, each counter in the special figure 1 reservation third area Stores the value of. When there are three reservations in the special figure 1 reservation ball storage area 203a, and the values of the respective counters are stored only in the special figure 1 reservation first to third areas, each counter in the special figure 1 reservation fourth area Stores the value of. As a result, the values of the counters acquired from the buffer for the counter at the timing of the start winning at the timing of the start winning to the first ball entrance 64, special figure 1 reserved first area, special figure 1 reserved second It can be stored in the area, the special view 1 reservation third area, and the special view 1 reservation fourth area.

  On the other hand, in the special figure 2 reservation ball storage area 203b, according to the ball entering timing to the second entrance 640, the first hit random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 obtained from the counter buffer, the stop The values of the pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 are respectively stored. In which reserve area (special figure 2 reserve first to fourth area) of the special figure 2 reserve sphere storage area 203 b the value of each counter is stored in the special figure 2 reserve sphere storage area 203 b Based on the number, it is determined in the same manner as in the case of the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a. As a result, the values of the counters acquired from the buffer for the counter at the timing of the start winning at the timing of the start winning to the second entrance 640, the special figure 2 reserve first area, special figure 2 reserve second It can be stored in the area, the special view 2 reserve third area, and the special view 2 reserve fourth area.

  In addition, when the value of each counter is stored in all of the special figure 1 reservation 1st-4th area, when the start winning prize to the 1st ball entrance 64 is detected, the value of each counter at that time Is discarded without being put on hold. Similarly, when the start winning to the second entrance 640 is detected when the values of the counters are stored in all of the first to fourth areas of special figure 2 suspension, Values are discarded without being suspended. That is, in the present embodiment, the value of each counter can be held up to a maximum of four start winnings at each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640.

  The RAM 203 is also provided with a special figure holding ball execution area 203c. At the start timing of the fluctuation effect, when there is a reserve in the special figure 2 reserve sphere storage area 203b, the first hit random number counter stored in the special figure 2 reserve first area of the special figure 2 reserve sphere storage area 203b Each value of C1, first hit type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3 and stop type counter CS1 is the first hit random number counter storage area 203c1 provided in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, and the first hit type It is moved to the counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and the variation type counter storage area 203c4.

  Also, when there is no hold in the special figure 2 reserve ball storage area 203b and there is hold in the special figure 1 reserve ball storage area 203a, the special figure 1 reserve first area of the special figure 1 reserve ball storage area 203a Respective values of the stored first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are transferred to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. Then, the values of the respective counters stored in the first hit random number counter storage area 203c1, the first hit type counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3 and the variation type counter storage area 203c4 of the special figure reservation ball execution area 203c On the basis of the above, the jackpot lottery and the determination of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect and the type of the stop symbol are performed.

  In the first symbol display device 37, the change effect is performed based on the determined change pattern and the stop type. Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the change pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, in the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation effect is performed based on the fluctuation pattern and the stop type notified by the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command.

  Thus, if there is a reserve in special figure 2 reserve ball storage area 203b, each counter stored in special figure 2 reserve sphere storage area 203b regardless of presence / absence of reserve in special figure 1 reserve sphere storage area 203a The value of is moved to the special figure reservation ball execution area 203c, and based on the value of each counter stored in the special figure reservation ball execution area 203c, determination of the big hit lottery, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect and the type of stop symbol Is done. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, the big winning lottery is performed with priority given to the starting winning combination at the second entrance 640 over the starting winning combination at the first entrance 64, and the variation effect is performed based on the winning jackpot. Is configured as.

  In addition, the value of each counter of the special figure 1 reserve first area of the special figure 1 reserve ball storage area 203a or the value of each counter of the special figure 2 reserve sphere first area of the special figure 2 reserve ball storage area 203b is After being moved to the special figure reservation ball execution area 203c, the value of each counter stored in the special figure 1 reserve second area or the special figure 2 reserve second area is set to the special figure 1 reserve first area or special 2 is shifted to the reserved first area. Then, the value of each counter stored in the special figure 1 reserve third area or the special figure 2 reserve third area is shifted to the special figure 1 reserve second area or the special figure 2 reserve second area where the free space is obtained. The value of each counter stored in the hold 4th area or the special view 2 hold 4th area is shifted to the special view 1 hold 3rd area or the special view 2 hold 3rd area where the values are free.

  As a result, when the fluctuation effect is started based on the value of each counter held in the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b, the holding by the second entrance 640 is reduced by one, and the special figure 2 holding ball One area of the storage area 203b is released. In addition, when the fluctuation effect is started based on the value of each counter held in the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a, the holding by the first ball entrance 64 is reduced by one, and the special figure 1 holding ball storage One area of the area 203a is opened.

  Although the pachinko machine 10 is configured to shift each data of the reserve areas (second to fourth) to an area with a smaller area number 1 regardless of the presence or absence of data in each reserve area. Data may be shifted only for the holding area in which (values of various counters) are stored (held). For example, the number of variation effects (the number of holding balls) held in the special drawing 1 holding ball storage area 203a before shifting data is 2, and the special drawing 1 holding first area and the special drawing 1 holding second area If the data is stored only in the special figure 1, the data of the special figure 1 reserve first area is shifted to the special figure reserve ball execution area 203c, then the data of the special figure 1 reserve second area is special diagram 1 reserve first The shift processing may be ended by shifting to one area. As a result, the data shift process is not performed for the reserve area (in the above example, the special figure 1 reserve third to fourth areas in the above example) where data is not stored (held), so the number of data shifts is reduced. Control burden can be reduced.

  The RAM 203 also has a common drawing consisting of four holding areas (generally reserved first to fourth areas) in which each counter value is stored for passage of a sphere in the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670. A holding ball storage area 203i is provided. Each reserved area is a second random number counter storage area for storing a second random number counter C4 value acquired from the counter buffer by passage of a sphere in the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670, respectively. It has 203i1.

  The second hit random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer is stored in the common drawing reservation ball storage area 203i in accordance with the passage timing of the ball in the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670. At this time, if there is no hold in the general drawing reservation ball storage area 203i and all the general drawing reservation first to fourth areas are empty areas, the second per random number counter C2 in the general drawing first holding area The value of is stored. If there is only one reservation in the common drawing reservation ball storage area 203a and the second hit random number counter C4 value is stored only in the common drawing reservation first area, the second hit random number in the common drawing reservation second area The value of the counter C4 is stored. If there are two reservations in the common drawing reservation ball storage area 203i and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is stored only in the common drawing reservation first and second areas, the third drawing in the common drawing reservation third area 2 stores the value of the random number counter C4. If there are three reservations in the common drawing reservation ball storage area 203a, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored only in the first to third areas of the common drawing reservation, the fourth in the common drawing reservation fourth area 2 stores the value of the random number counter C4.

  Thereby, in the order in which passage of the sphere is detected in the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer at the passage timing of the sphere is It can be stored in one area, a general drawing reservation second area, a general drawing reservation third area, and a general drawing reservation fourth area. When passage of a ball is detected in the first or second through gate 67, 670 when the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in all of the first to fourth areas of the general drawing reservation: The value of the second random number counter C4 at that time is discarded without being held.

  The RAM 203 is also provided with a common drawing reservation ball execution area 203 j. At the start timing of the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol), when there is a hold in the common drawing reservation ball storage area 203i, it is stored in the common drawing reservation first area of the common drawing reservation ball storage area 203i Each value of the second hit random number counter C4 is moved to a second hit random number counter storage area 203j1 provided in the common drawing reservation sphere execution area 203j. Then, based on the value of the second collision random number counter C4 stored in the second collision random number counter storage area 203j1 of the common drawing reservation ball execution area 203j, a collision lottery of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is performed.

  In addition, when the value of the second random number counter C4 of the common drawing reservation first area of the common drawing reservation ball storage area 203i is moved to the common drawing reservation ball execution area 203j, then it is stored in the common drawing reservation second area The value of the second random number counter C4 is shifted to the vacant common drawing reservation first area. Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the common drawing reserve third area is shifted to the common drawing reserve second area where the value of the second random number counter C4 is free, and of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the common drawing reserve fourth area. The value is shifted to the general drawing reservation third area where the value is free.

  Thereby, when the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) is started based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 held in the common drawing reservation ball storage area 203i, only a single normal symbol is held. As a result, one area of the common drawing reservation ball storage area 203i is opened.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, when performing data shift processing between the respective reserve areas (generic diagram reserve first to fourth areas) of the regular drawing reserve ball storage area 203i, whether or not there is data in each reserve area No, each data in the reserve area (generally reserved 2nd to 4th area) is configured to be shifted to the area where area number is 1 smaller, but as in the case of the special figure, the data (values of various counters The data may be shifted only for the holding area in which the memory is stored (held). For example, the number of change effects (the number of holding balls) held in the common drawing holding ball storage area 203i before the data shift is 2, and only in the common drawing holding first area and the common drawing holding second area If the data is stored, shift the data of the common drawing reservation first area to the common drawing reservation ball execution area 203 j, and then shift the data of the common drawing reservation second area to the common drawing reservation first area , Shift processing may be terminated. As a result, the data shift process is not performed on the holding area (in the above example, the 3rd to 4th areas in the above example) where data is not stored (held), so the number of data shifts is reduced. Control burden can be reduced.

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description of the RAM 203 is continued. The special ball 1 for holding ball number counter 203d and the special ball 2 for holding ball number counter 203e are the first entrance detected in the timer interrupt process (refer to FIG. 14) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. The number of holding balls (waiting for change) (variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on entering the ball into the second ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (start prize) It is a counter which counts the number of times up to 4 times respectively. The special figure 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 203e are set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process (S1613 in FIG. 20) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time the start winning is detected and the number of balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 respectively. On the other hand, the special figure 1 holding ball number counter 203a and the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 203b are decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation effect is performed.

  In addition, the value of the special figure 1 holding ball number counter 203d (that is, the holding ball number), each counter value in the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a based on the fact that the ball has entered the first entrance 64 When stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the special figure 1 holding ball number command output from the main control board. The special figure 1 holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the special drawing 1 holding ball number counter 203d is incremented by one. .

  In addition, the value of the special figure 2 reserve ball number counter 203e (that is, the reserve ball number), each counter value in the special figure 2 reserve ball storage area 203b based on the ball entering the second entrance 640. When stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the special figure 2 holding ball number command output from the main control board. The special figure 2 holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the starting winning is detected and the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 203 e is incremented by one. .

  The voice lamp control device 113 is a holding ball for variation effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64, which is held by the main controller 110 by the special figure 1 holding ball number command and the special figure 2 holding ball number command. It is possible to acquire the number and the value of the holding ball number itself of the variation effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance ball entrance 640. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls of the variable effect can be managed without accessing the main control device 110 (a special figure 1 holding sphere number counter 223a and a special figure 2 of FIG. See holding ball number counter 223 b). Also, every time when the start winning is detected, the main ball controller 110 transmits a ball number command for holding balls to the sound lamp control device 113 so that the number of holding balls of the fluctuation effect managed in the sound lamp control device 113 is noise. Even if the main ball control unit 110 deviates from the actual number of balls held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of the etc., it is possible to correct the deviation by means of the ball number command received next.

  In addition, to the number of holding balls of the fluctuation effect associated with the start winning to the first ball entrance 64 managed within the sound lamp control device 113 (special figure 1 holding ball number counter 223a), and to the second ball entrance 640 The voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control unit 110, and the number of balls held for fluctuation effect associated with the start winning prize of (the special figure 2 reservation ball number counter 223b) is based on the fluctuation pattern command It is updated at the timing which sets the mode of the fluctuation production in 3rd symbol display 81 (that is, the timing which starts fluctuation production). That is, if the variable effect to be started is accompanied by the start winning to the first ball entrance 64, the number of balls for holding the variable effect accompanying the starting to the first ball entrance 64 is reduced by one and the fluctuation started If the effect is associated with the start winning prize for the second ball entry port 640, the number of balls reserved for the variable effect accompanying the starting prize for the second ball entry port 640 is reduced by one.

  The main control unit 110 causes the fluctuation pattern command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 to indicate that the fluctuation type is indicated by the fluctuation pattern command with the start winning to the first ball entrance 64, The information which shows whether it is what accompanies the start winning to the second ball entrance 640 is included. In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the information included in the fluctuation pattern command, whether the fluctuation effect to be started is associated with the start winning to the first ball entrance 64 or the start to the second ball entrance 640 Judging whether it is the result of winning or not, based on the result of the judgment, the number of balls for the change effect due to the starting winning to the first ball entrance 64 and the fluctuation due to the starting winning for the second ball entrance 640 A process of reducing one of the number of holding balls of the effect by 1 is performed.

  In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 causes the display control device 114 to hold the number of balls of the variation effect associated with the start winning to the first ball entry 64 every time the number of balls to be managed internally changes. , A display holding ball number command for notifying the number of holding balls obtained by adding the number of holding balls of the variation effect accompanying the start winning to the second entry ball opening 640 is transmitted. The display control device 114 displays the number-of-held-balls number pattern corresponding to the number of held balls notified by the number-of-held-cells-for-display command in the held display area Db of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, in the reserve display area Db, the number of the variable displays (the number of reserved balls) suspended by the start winning to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is indicated to the player.

  The general drawing reserve ball number counter 203f is such that the ball passes the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670 which is detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) which is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. It is a counter which counts the number of holding balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display of the 2nd symbol (normal symbol) performed with the 2nd symbol display 83 based on what was done up to four times. In the initial setting process (S1613 in FIG. 20) of the RAM 203 after power on, zero is set as an initial value. Then, each time the start winning is detected and the number of balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 (S1503 to S1504, S1508 to S1509 in FIG. 18). On the other hand, the common drawing retention ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is subjected to variable display.

  It is possible to hold the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) up to four times by the common drawing reservation ball number counter 203f. In addition, the second symbol hold lamp 84 (see FIG. 2) for the number of holding balls indicated by the common drawing holding ball number counter 203f is turned on. As a result, the number of holding balls of the variable display of the second symbol is notified to the player.

  The special figure type flag 203k is a second entering ball opening whether the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) which is a special symbol is executed along with the start winning to the first ball entrance 64 It is a flag indicating whether it is to be executed along with the start winning to 640. Indicates that the variation representation of the first symbol (third symbol) is to be executed along with the start winning for the first ball entry 64 when the special figure type flag 203k is off, and the special figure type When the flag 203k is on, it is shown that the fluctuation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) is to be executed along with the start winning to the second ball entry port 640.

  The special figure type flag 203k is set to off or on at the first stage of setting the start of the variation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol). Specifically, when it becomes the execution start timing of the fluctuation design of the first symbol (the third symbol), the value of the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0, and the start to the second ball entrance 640 If the values of various counters acquired along with the winning are held in the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b, the various counters stored in the special figure 2 holding first area of the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b Is shifted to the special figure reservation ball execution area 203c, and the special figure type flag 203k is set to ON (see S1304 to S1307 in FIG. 16).

  In addition, when it becomes the execution start timing of the fluctuation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol), while the value of special figure 2 reservation sphere number counter 203e is 0, the value of special figure 1 retention sphere number counter 203d is If the values of various counters acquired with the start winning to the first ball entrance 64 are larger than 0 and the values of various counters are reserved in the special figure 1 reserve sphere storage area 203a, the special figure 1 reserve sphere storage area 203a The values of the various counters stored in the special figure 1 reserve first area are shifted to the special figure reserve ball execution area 203c, and the special figure type flag 203k is set to OFF (see S1304 and S1309 to S1312 in FIG. 16). ).

  In MPU 201, when it is determined that the jackpot by the jackpot lottery performed at the execution start timing of the variation design of the first symbol (third symbol), as a jackpot type table (see FIG. 8 (b)) used to determine the jackpot type Based on the figure type flag 203k, either one for “first ball entrance” or “second ball entrance” is set. Specifically, when the special figure type flag 203k is off, the fluctuation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) determined to be a big hit is executed along with the start winning to the first ball entrance 64 Therefore, the jackpot type table for "first ball entry" is set. On the other hand, when the special figure type flag 203k is on, the fluctuation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) determined to be a big hit is executed along with the start winning to the second entrance 640. , Set the jackpot type table for the "second ball entrance".

  As described above, the jackpot type in the case of a big hit when winning the first entry ball slot 64 is 15R probability variation jackpot with a probability of 1⁄4 (= 25/100), 1⁄4 (= 25/100) The probability of) becomes 15R normal jackpot, and 1/2 (= 50/100) becomes 4R probability variation jackpot. In addition, big hit classification when it becomes big hit with the winning a prize in the second entrance ball entrance 640, it becomes 15R probability variation big hit with probability of 1/2 (= 50/100), 1/4 (= 25/100) The probability is 15R normal jackpot, and the probability of 1⁄4 (= 25/100) is 4R probability variation jackpot. That is, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of jackpot is that the ball entered the first entrance 64 when the ball entered the second entrance 640 It is set higher than the case.

  As described above, the second ball entry port 640 is accompanied by the motorized symbol 640a, and the ease with which the ball enters the second ball entry port 640 changes in accordance with the open / closed state of the motorized symbol 640a. On the other hand, the first ball entrance 64 does not have a motorized part like the second ball entrance 640, and the ball can enter the ball at all times.

  Therefore, in many cases, the motorized accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the motorized entry is performed. Aim the ball 64 so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 toward the mouth 64 (so-called "left-handed"), and entering the first entrance 64 has many chances for a big hit lottery It is advantageous for the player to obtain and aim to be a big hit. On the other hand, during the definite change or time, the motorized accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in the open state and the second entrance 640 is likely to enter the ball, so to the second entrance 640 Direct the ball so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and entering the second entrance 640 aims to become a 15R positive variation hit jackpot Is advantageous to the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment emits a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the process of being changed, time is short, or is normal). You can change the way of “right-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored in addition to the various areas, counters, and flags shown in FIG. And a work area (work area) in which values of counters, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 21), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 20) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specified winning opening 65a, 650a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side with the axis as an axis and a solenoid for driving a motorized product etc. is connected, and the MPU 201 receives various commands for these through the input / output port 205. Send control signal.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 is outputted from the various switches 208. Various processings are executed based on the control signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81, or super reach It instructs the display control device 114 to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

  Here, the details of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 9 (a). FIG. 9A is a schematic view schematically showing various data stored in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. The ROM 222 has at least an audio data storage area 222a.

  The audio data storage area 222 a is an area for storing audio data which is data for reproducing audio output from the audio output device 226. The voice data storage area 222a is a voice to be output when a predetermined character image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a light emission effect image in which a predetermined region is brightly illuminated on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Voice data corresponding to each voice type is stored, such as voices to be output to and voices to be output when reach occurs during variation effects in the third symbol display device 81 (hereinafter referred to as "reach voice") There is.

  When the MPU 221 receives a display command indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114, it reads out audio data corresponding to the display content indicated by the display command from the audio data storage area 222a of the ROM 222222 The audio reproduced based on the audio data is output from the audio output device 226. As a result, it is possible to cause the third symbol display device 81 to output voice data matching the display content from the voice output device 226.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command received from the main control device 110 and the operation state of the frame button 22 by the player, and the determined display mode Are instructed to the display control unit 114 by a command. Therefore, in the audio lamp control device 113, the audio data is selected according to the determined display mode of the third symbol display device 81, and the audio reproduced by the audio data is output from the audio output device 226. Is also possible. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a display command indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is received from the display control device 81, and the voice is displayed according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 indicated by the display command. The data is selected, and the audio reproduced by the audio data is output from the audio output device 226.

  Thereby, even if an image different from the display mode determined by the audio lamp control device 113 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 due to noise or the like, the display command received from the display control device 114 Since the display contents of the three symbol display device 81 can be grasped, it is possible to output from the voice output device 226 a voice that matches the display content actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the display control device 114 sequentially notifies the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113 by a display command, whereby the display timing of the image in the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output device 113 The output timing of the voice can be easily matched, and the occurrence of the sound deviation can be suppressed.

  By the way, in the present pachinko machine 10, different voice data are prepared as reach voices for each of the main symbols of the third symbol (10 types of character symbols corresponding to the numbers “0” to “9”). Specifically, a character design (for example, a main symbol of "0") is generated when a normal reach (a reach that makes a 15R normal jackpot when the symbols are aligned) occurs with the main symbol of "0" as the reach symbol. In the voice data storage area 222a, 0th design normal reach voice data 222a0, which is voice data for reproducing a voice of "reach!" In the voice of "sago", is stored. Character pattern corresponding to the main symbol of "1" (for example, when a probability variation reach (a reach that becomes a 4R probability variation jackpot or a 15R probability variation jackpot if the symbols are aligned) occurs with the main symbol of "1" "as the reach symbol) The first pattern probability change reach voice data 222a1, which is voice data for reproducing the voice of "reach!" In the voice of "Tako", is stored in the voice data storage area 222a.

  Also, for each of the main symbols of "2" to "9", when the main reach is a normal reach or a probability change reach occurs, the voice of the character symbol corresponding to the main symbol "reach it!" Voice data for reproducing voices such as "reach!" And "reach!" Are stored in the voice data storage area 222a as the second symbol normal reach voice data 222a2 to the ninth symbol probability change reach voice data 222a9, respectively. It is done.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the reach occurs, the reach voice is changed for each main symbol that has become the reach symbol. Moreover, the reach voice is output with the voice of the character pattern corresponding to the main pattern. As a result, it is possible to give the player an impression as to whether the character arranged on the main symbol that has become the reach symbol has notified the reach. Therefore, the player's interest in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be enhanced.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main symbol corresponding to the even number is a reach symbol, as described above, when the symbols are aligned, a 15R normal jackpot occurs. Also, when the main symbol corresponding to the odd number is a reach symbol, 4R probability variation jackpot or 15R probability variation jackpot occurs when the symbols are aligned.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the reach voice output when reach occurs with the main symbol corresponding to the odd number is "probable change reach voice", and the reach voice output when reach occurs with the main symbol corresponding to the even number The two are distinguished as “normal reach voice”.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 9 (b), the difference between the probability change reach sound and the normal reach sound will be described. FIG. 9B is a schematic view schematically showing the probability variation reach voice and the normal reach voice.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (b), as for the probability variation reach voice, the playback of the sound section starts as soon as the playback is started, and a voice such as "reach!" Is uttered. Then, after the predetermined period (1500 milliseconds in the example of FIG. 9B), the sound section ends and the reproduction of the probability change reach sound ends. On the other hand, when the normal reach voice is started to play, the silent section is played for a certain time, for example, 20 milliseconds in the present embodiment, and then the predetermined time length (1500 milliseconds in the example of FIG. Play the sound section of). That is, when the reproduction of the reach sound is normally started, the first 20 milliseconds are silenced, and then an audio such as "reach!" Is uttered.

  The time length of the sound interval is not limited to 1500 milliseconds, and may be an arbitrary time length. In addition, the time length may be different between the probability change reach voice and the normal reach voice, and the length of the sound section is an arbitrary time length for each of the reach voice data 222a0 to 222a9 corresponding to each main symbol. It may be set to

  As described above with reference to FIG. 4 (b), the pachinko machine 10 normally uses the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed. A double reach is established that can be a jackpot or a definite jackpot. In other words, the normal reach and the positive change reach occur at the same time.

  In a conventional pachinko machine, when double reach occurs in the third symbol display device, the display control device notifies the voice lamp control device of "probability change reach establishment" as the display content of the third symbol display device And a display command for notifying "normal reach established", and in the voice lamp control device, the probability change reach voice and the normal reach voice are superimposed and output from the voice output device. However, as described above, in the case of different voices according to the character pattern corresponding to the main symbol that has become the reach symbol, if these voices are superimposed and output, with the probability change reach voice and the normal reach voice, There is a problem that it becomes difficult to hear each reach voice.

  In addition, it is possible to make it easy to hear each reach voice by completely overlapping and outputting the words emitted in each voice with the probability change reach voice and the normal reach voice, but for that purpose, with each reach voice The timing of the words to be emitted must be matched, and each reach voice becomes uniform only by the difference in voice, and it is lacking in interest. Furthermore, in the first place, it is necessary to reproduce the output of each reach voice in exact synchronization while reproducing the words spoken in each voice completely in time, and the control becomes complicated. The problem of that also arises.

  On the other hand, it is also conceivable to prepare voice data for double reach, but it is necessary to prepare the voice data for each combination of two sets of main symbols (normal symbol and definite change symbol) that established double reach, The storage capacity of the ROM 222 may be increased.

  Furthermore, when double reach is established, the player is expected to have the probability that the jackpot probability will be established as the jackpot rather than the jackpot normally because the jackpot probability is higher after the jackpot. . Therefore, when anticipation of the player is taken into consideration, when the double reach is uttered, the voice of the character corresponding to the definite variation reach is established rather than the voice of the character corresponding to the main symbol establishing the normal reach. There is also a request that the player wants to hear the reach voice to the player by voice, that is, he wants to hear the probability change reach voice to the player.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 first achieves the probability change reach as the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Configure to send reach display command to notify reach establishment together with the type of symbol, and then immediately send reach display command notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach symbol that established normal reach Keep it. On the other hand, when the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 receives each display command from the display control device 113, it immediately reads out the audio data corresponding to the display content indicated by the display command from the audio data storage area 222a. The audio is reproduced from the audio output device 226. That is, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the voice lamp control device 113 first outputs the probability change reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) in which the probability change reach is established, and then, Immediately, the normal reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) that has established the normal reach is output.

  Here, as described with reference to FIG. 9B, in the probability variation reach voice, the playback of the voiced section is started as soon as the playback is started, and a voice such as “reach!” Is uttered. On the other hand, since the normal reach sound is a silent section for about 20 milliseconds even when the reproduction is started, the normal reach sound remains silent and the reproduction is started.

  As soon as the MPU 221 starts playing the reach sound, it checks the number of reach sounds currently being played. Then, when there are two reach voices currently being played, the play of the reach voice played most recently, that is, the normal reach voice whose play is started later is stopped. Thus, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probability change reach voice is reproduced to the end. Also, since the first 20 milliseconds of the normal reach voice is a silent interval, even if the normal reach voice playback is started once, the normal reach voice playback is stopped during the silent interval playback. . Therefore, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probability change reach voice can be presented to the player.

  When the normal reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 transmits a display command for notifying "normal reach established" along with the reach symbol to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp is displayed. Based on the display command, control device 113 outputs a normal reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) for which the normal reach is established. Also in this case, the first 20 milliseconds is a silent section, but even if a voice such as "reach!" Is output with a delay of 20 milliseconds, it does not feel to humans that it is output with a delay. In addition, if the third symbol display device 81 does not display an image moving in perfect synchronization with the sound, even if a sound such as "Leach!" Is output about 20 milliseconds later, the sound is out of sync with the sound and the display. Does not make the player feel that a has occurred. Therefore, in the normal reach voice, setting a silent section of 20 milliseconds at first does not cause a problem.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the time length of the silent section of the normal reach voice is set to 20 milliseconds, but the time length does not make it feel that the voice such as "reach!" Is delayed and is output. It may be set arbitrarily as long as there is no range of time during which the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 do not cause a sound shift.

  The voice data storage area 222 a stores other voice data 222 a 10 as voice data other than reach voice data. In the other sound data 222a10, as described above, sound data for reproducing a sound to be output when a predetermined character image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a light emission effect on the third symbol display device 81 Audio data for reproducing audio to be output when an image is displayed is included.

  Next, the details of the RAM 223 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9C is a schematic view schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 223. The RAM 223 is a special figure 1 holding ball number counter 223a, a special figure 2 holding ball number counter 223b, a reach sound reproduction in progress counter 223c, a reproduction sound data storage area 223d, a probability short time flag 223e, a first through gate passage flag 223f, a second A through gate passing flag 223g, a first through gate passing time counter 223h, a second through gate passing time counter 223i, a first through gate passing sphere number counter 223j, and a second through gate passing sphere number counter 223k There is.

  The special figure 1 holding ball number counter 223a, like the special figure 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110, the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display 37 along with the start winning to the first ball entrance 64 The variation display performed by the symbol display device 81) is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of times of waiting) of the change presentation held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

  The special figure 2 reservation ball number counter 223b, like the special figure 2 reservation ball number counter 203e of the main control unit 110, the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display 37 with the start winning to the second entrance 640 The variation display performed by the symbol display device 81) is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of times of waiting) of the change presentation held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

  As described above, the voice lamp control unit 113 directly accesses the main control unit 110, and the special view 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special view 2 holding ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110. You can not get the value. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of holding balls for which the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 have won, based on the command transmitted from the main control unit 110, and holds the special figure 1 pending. The number of holding balls is managed by the number-of-balls counter 223a and the special figure 2 number-of-helds ball counter 223b.

  More specifically, the sound lamp control device 113 adds the number of holding balls of the variation effect by the start winning to the first entrance 64 and adds the value of the special figure 1 holding ball number counter 203d in the main control unit 110 If the special figure 1 ball holding number command sent from the main control unit 110 is received, the special figure 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110 included in the special figure 1 holding ball number command is added The later value (that is, the number of balls of the variation effect due to the start winning to the first entrance 64 held by the main controller 110) is stored in the special figure 1 number of balls counter 223a (S2007 in FIG. 24) reference).

  In addition, the voice lamp control device 113, when the number of holding balls of the fluctuation effect is added by the start winning to the second entrance 640, the value of the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 203e is added in the main controller 110 When the special figure 2 holding ball number command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received, the value after addition of the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 203e of the main control unit 110 included in the special figure 2 holding ball number command (That is, the number of balls in the variation effect due to the start winning to the second entrance 640 held by the main control unit 110 is stored in the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 223b (see S2010 in FIG. 24).

  On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 is a variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 when the value of the special figure 1 holding ball number counter 203d or the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 203e in the main control device 110 is subtracted. Is received, and when the aspect of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is set according to the reception, the fluctuation effect is associated with the start winning to the first ball entrance 64 or to the second ball entrance 640 Depending on whether it is the start winning combination, one of the special figure 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 223b is decremented by 1 (see S2108 and S2109 in FIG. 25). It should be noted that whether the fluctuation effect is associated with the start winning to the first ball entrance 64 or with the starting winning to the second ball entrance 640 depends on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. The information that indicates is included, and the determination is made based on the information.

  Thus, according to the command transmitted from the main controller 110, the values of the special figure 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 223b are updated, so the special figure 1 holding ball number of the main control device 110 is The value can be updated while being synchronized with the counter 203d and the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 203e.

  The values of the special figure 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 223b are used to display the holding ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the special figure 1 holding ball number command or the special figure 2 holding ball number command, the audio lamp control device 113 selects the holding ball number indicated by the command in the special figure 1 holding ball number counter 223a or special drawing (2) Store or update at the timing of storing in the number of reserved balls number counter 223b or updating the value of the special figure 1 number of held balls counter 223a or the special figure 2 number of held balls counter 223b according to the reception of the fluctuation pattern command In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value obtained by adding the value of the special figure 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the value of the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 223b after the event is performed, the display holding ball number command It transmits to the display control apparatus 114 (see S2008 in FIG. 24 and S2110 in FIG. 25).

  When the display control device 114 receives this display ball holding number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball number pattern for the value of the holding ball number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled to be displayed in the hold display area Db of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special drawing 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the special drawing 2 holding ball number counter 223b are synchronized with the special drawing 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special drawing 2 holding ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. , Its value is changed. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed in the holding display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the special drawing 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control 110 and the special drawing 2 holding ball number counter 203e. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The reach voice reproducing counter 223c is a counter that counts reach voices being reproduced (outputting from the audio output device 226). The reach voice reproducing counter 223c is set to 0 as an initial value in an initial value setting process (see S1810 in FIG. 22) of the RAM 223 which is executed when the power is turned on. Then, when the reach display command for notifying reach establishment (certain reach reach establishment or normal reach establishment) is received from the display control device 114, the MPU 221 reaches the reach corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) included in the reach display command. The voice is read from the voice data storage area 222a and reproduced, and 1 is added to the value of the reach voice reproduction counter 223c (see S2304 in FIG. 29).

  When the value of the reach voice reproducing counter 223c becomes "2", it means that two reach voices are being reproduced. Two reach voices are being reproduced when a double reach is established in the third symbol display device 81. That is, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 first reaches the reach symbol in which the probability change reach is established as the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Configured to send a reach display command notifying a reach establishment together with the type of, and immediately transmit a reach display command notifying a reach establishment together with a type of reach symbol that has normally reached a reach There is. Moreover, these two reach display commands are transmitted continuously, and between the two reach display commands, the other display commands (the commands showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81, other than the reach display command) Command is configured not to be sent.

  On the other hand, when each command is received from the display control device 113, the MPU 221 immediately reads from the voice data storage area 222a voice data corresponding to the display content indicated by the command and reproduces the voice. Output from the audio output device 226.

  That is, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the voice lamp control device 113 first outputs the probability change reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) in which the probability change reach is established, and then, Immediately, the normal reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) that has established the normal reach is output. Therefore, in this case, first, the reach voice reproducing counter 223c becomes "1" at the stage when the probability change reach voice is output, and then the reach voice playing counter 223c becomes "2" at the normal reach voice output. Become.

  Here, as described above, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the double reach occurs in the third symbol display device, the voice lamp control device is a command for notifying “probability change reach establishment” as the display content of the third symbol display device When the command to notify “normal reach established” is received from the display control device, the probability change reach voice and the normal reach voice are superimposed and output from the voice output device. However, as described above, in the case of different voices according to the character pattern corresponding to the main symbol that has become the reach symbol, if these voices are superimposed and output, with the probability change reach voice and the normal reach voice, There is a problem that it becomes difficult to hear each reach voice.

  In addition, it is possible to make it easy to hear each reach voice by completely overlapping and outputting the words emitted in each voice with the probability change reach voice and the normal reach voice, but for that purpose, with each reach voice The timing of the words to be emitted must be matched, and each reach voice becomes uniform only by the difference in voice, and it is lacking in interest. Furthermore, in the first place, it is necessary to reproduce the output of each reach voice in exact synchronization while reproducing the words spoken in each voice completely in time, and the control becomes complicated. The problem of that also arises.

  On the other hand, it is also conceivable to prepare voice data for double reach, but it is necessary to prepare the voice data for each combination of two sets of main symbols (normal symbol and definite change symbol) that established double reach, The storage capacity of the ROM 222 may be increased.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, it outputs reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) indicated by the reach display command received first of all On the other hand, when the value of the reach voice playing counter 223c becomes "2" and the number of reach voices being played becomes two, the reach voice played most recently, ie, the normal reach voice of which playback is later started Stop playback.

  As a result, when double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, two of the probability change reach sound and the normal reach sound are once reproduced, but the normal reach sound is immediately stopped from being reproduced. , The odd change reach voice will be played to the end. Here, as described with reference to FIG. 9B, in the normal reach voice, the first 20 milliseconds is a silent section. Therefore, even if reproduction of the normal reach voice is started once, reproduction of the normal reach voice is stopped during the reproduction of the silent section. Therefore, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probability change reach voice can be presented to the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when double reach is established, the display control device 114 first transmits a reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach symbol that has established the probability change reach, and thereafter, The reach display command for notifying reach establishment is sent together with the type of reach symbol that normally establishes the reach, and the voice lamp control device 113 firstly follows the received reach display command. Start playing two reach sounds in order. When the audio lamp control device 113 determines that two reach voices are being reproduced, it stops the reproduction of the reach voice (the reach voice whose reproduction has been started later) which has most recently started to be reproduced. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 does not determine whether the reach display command received from the display control device 114 is the probability change reach or the normal reach, and as a result, the double reach is the third symbol display device 81. When it is displayed on the screen, the player can hear only the probability change reach sound. That is, when double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while suppressing an increase in processing load, only the probability change reach voice can be presented to the player.

  As the value of the reach voice playing counter 223c becomes “2”, the reach voice playing counter 223c stops the playing of the reach voice played last (the normal reach voice started playing later). It is initialized to "0" in accordance with Further, the reach voice reproducing counter 223c is initialized to “0” also when another display command other than the reach display command is received from the display control device 114 by the voice lamp control device 113.

  The reproduction sound data storage area 223 d is an area for storing sound data for reproducing the sound outputted from the sound output device 226. The MPU 221 generates an audio signal while decoding the audio data stored in the reproduced audio data storage area 223d, and outputs the generated audio signal to the audio output device 226, whereby the audio is output from the audio output device 226. , Be played.

  Here, the audio lamp control device 113 has four audio reproduction channels, and is configured to be able to reproduce four audio data simultaneously. The reproduction audio data storage area 223 d is provided with an area for storing audio data to be reproduced by the audio reproduction channel for every four audio reproduction channels. That is, a first channel area 223d1 for storing audio data to be reproduced on a first audio reproduction channel, and a second channel area 223d2 for storing audio data to be reproduced on a second audio reproduction channel; A third channel area 223d3 for storing audio data to be reproduced on the third audio reproduction channel, and a fourth channel area 223d4 for storing audio data to be reproduced on the fourth audio reproduction channel The voice data storage area 223 d is provided.

  The MPU 221 reads audio data corresponding to the display content from the audio data storage area 222 a of the ROM 222 based on the display content of the third symbol display device 81 indicated by the display command received from the display control device 114. The read audio data is stored in any one of the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to d4 of the reproduced audio data storage area 223d.

  The MPU 221 decodes audio data stored in the corresponding first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to d4 for each of the first to fourth audio reproduction channels, and generates an audio signal. Then, the audio signal generated for each audio reproduction channel is mixed and then output to the audio output device 226. Thus, four audio data can be simultaneously reproduced and can be output from the audio output device 226.

  The probability variation time short flag 223 e is a flag indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability variation state or a time reduction state. The probability variation time short flag 223e indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a definite variation or time-saving mode when on, and when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is in a definite state or in a short time, it is normal. Indicates that.

  If the voice lamp control device 113 receives a confirmation command from the main control device 110 (a command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to confirm and display the stop symbol) from the main control device 110, the probability variation time short flag 223e is the third Updating is performed based on the result of final display in the symbol display device 81 (see S2021 in FIG. 24).

  Specifically, when the symbol of the probability variation big hit (15R probability variation big hit or 4R probability variation big hit) is displayed, since the subsequent gaming state is definite variation, the probability variation time short flag 223e is set to on. In addition, when the symbol of normal big hit (15R normal big hit) is decidedly displayed, then the game state is in the middle of the hour until 100 variation effects are performed, so the probability change time short flag 223e is set to ON. Do. In addition, when the gaming state is during the short time, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation effect was performed 100 times after becoming a big hit normally every time the finalized display of the symbol of the out is performed, and the fluctuation effect was performed 100 times If it is determined, since the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the normal mode, the positive short time flag 223e is set to off.

  The probability variation time short flag 223 e is used to perform control to instruct the player via the third symbol display device 81 so-called “right strike” or “left strike” according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. As described above, the probability of becoming a big hit between the case where the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the case where the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is the high probability state even in the low probability state. But the same, but the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot, the ball when entering the second entrance ball 640 into the first entrance 64 ball Is set higher than when entering the ball. On the other hand, the first ball entry port 64 does not have a motorized part like the second ball entry port 640, and the ball can enter the ball at all times.

  Therefore, when the gaming state is in the normal state, there are many cases where the motorized accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is in the closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so there is no electromotive entity. A ball is fired so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 toward the first ball entrance 64 (so-called "left-handed"), and a big hit is made by entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 It is advantageous for the player to gain a lot of opportunities and aim to be a big hit. On the other hand, during the definite change or time, the motorized accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in the open state and the second entrance 640 is likely to enter the ball, so to the second entrance 640 Direct the ball so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and entering the second entrance 640 aims to become a 15R positive variation hit jackpot Is advantageous to the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment emits a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the process of being changed, time is short, or is normal). You can change the way of “right-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  However, as a specification of the pachinko machine 10, there are players who do not know that the method of firing the ball has to be changed between "left strike" and "right strike" as the specification of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 displays on the third symbol display device 81 hitting direction instruction screens 811 and 812 for instructing the player to "left" and "right".

  Here, with reference to FIG. 10, the hitting direction instruction screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 10 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing the player to "turn left", and FIG. 10 (b) is "right hitting" the player. FIG. 8 is a schematic view schematically showing a hitting direction indication screen for instructing the ball.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (a), the ball hitting direction instruction screen for instructing the player to "hit left" is displayed on the lower left side of the third symbol display device 81 in a front view as "打 hit left!" It is a screen on which a symbol 811 is displayed. Since the symbol 811 includes a left-pointing arrow, and the symbol 811 is disposed on the left side of the third symbol display device 81 in a front view, display a hitting direction indication screen instructing "left hit". Thus, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner so that the ball is fired so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display device 80 provided with the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 10 (b), the hitting direction instruction screen for instructing the player to "right strike" is displayed on the bottom right side of the third symbol display device 81 in a front view and "hit to the right !! → "" Is displayed on the screen. Since the symbol 812 includes an arrow pointing to the right, and the symbol 812 is disposed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 in a front view, display a hitting direction indication screen instructing "right hitting". Thus, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the ball should be fired so that the ball passes on the right side of the variable display device 80 provided with the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines from the probability variation time short flag 223 e whether or not there is a possibility that the player has made a left strike if the gaming state is in the probability variation state or the time reduction status. Then, if there is a possibility that the player is hitting left, right hitting is likely to be a 15R positive variation jackpot during positive or negative, and it is advantageous for the player, so the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. A right-handed instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to display a hitting direction instruction screen instructing “right-handed” (S2216 in FIG. 27). When the display control device 114 receives this rightward turning instruction screen display command, it displays on the third symbol display device 81 a batting direction instructing screen for instructing "rightning" shown in FIG. 10 (b). This makes it possible to cause the player to "right strike" the ball, and the player can enjoy the game in an advantageous state.

  If the gaming state is normal, the voice lamp control device 113 determines from the probability variation time short flag 223 e whether or not there is a possibility that the player is hitting the right. Then, if there is a possibility that the player has made a right strike, it is easy to surely obtain a starting winning prize by the first entrance 64 during normal times, and a lot of opportunities for a jackpot lottery can be obtained. Since the player is more advantageous to the player, a left strike instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to display a strike direction instruction screen instructing “left strike” on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 26 S2208). When the display control device 114 receives the left hitting instruction screen display command, the display control device 114 displays on the third symbol display device 81 a hitting direction instructing screen for instructing “left hitting” shown in FIG. 10A. As a result, it is possible to cause the player to "beat" the ball, and the player can enjoy the game in an advantageous state.

  Returning to FIG. 9C, the description will be continued. The first through gate passage flag 223 f is a flag indicating that a sphere has passed through the first through gate 67. The second through gate passage flag 223 g is a flag indicating that a sphere has passed through the second through gate 670. The first through gate passing flag 223 f and the second through gate passing flag 223 g indicate that a sphere has passed through the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670 when both are on, and when the ball is off It indicates that the sphere has not passed through the 1 through gate 67 or the second through gate 670.

  The first through gate passing flag 223f and the second through gate passing flag 223g are both set to an initial value of OFF in an initial value setting process (see S1810 of FIG. 22) of the RAM 223 executed at power on. Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a first through gate passage command, which is sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 and notifies that the sphere has passed through the first through gate 67, The MPU 221 sets the first through gate passage flag 223 f to on. Also, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a second through gate passage command to notify that the sphere has passed through the second through gate 670, which is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, The MPU 221 sets the second through gate passage flag 223g to ON.

  Here, the first through gate passage command is a command that the main control unit 110 transmits to the audio amplifier control unit 113 when the main control unit 110 detects the passage of the sphere of the first through gate 67. . The second through gate passage command is a command transmitted by the main controller 110 to the audio amplifier controller 113 when the passage of the ball of the second through gate 670 is detected in the main controller 110.

  The details will be described later with reference to the free chart of FIG. 26, but the MPU 221 performs right-handed / left-handed determination processing. In this right-handed-left-hand judging process, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, the second through gate 670 is displayed for 10 seconds while observing the on / off state of the second through gate passing flag 223g. When it is detected that the ball has passed three balls, it is determined that the player is “right-handed” despite being in the normal state, and a batted ball is instructed to “left-hand” which is advantageous to the player in the normal state. A left-handed instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the direction instruction screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a definite or changing state, the on / off state of the first through gate passing flag 223f is observed, and the ball is three balls in the first through gate 67 in 10 seconds. When it is detected that the player has passed, it is determined that the player is "left-handed" despite the fact that it is in the process of being changed or time-shortened, and an instruction of "right-handed" is given to the player. A right-handed command screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the hitting direction commanded screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, for example, when it is advantageous for the player to hit the right, the player can hit the left only by one ball passing through the through gate on the left side of the game board. There was a case in which it was judged that they were doing, and a notification was issued to instruct "right-handed". However, it is quite possible that some balls flow down the left side of the game board, even if the player is hitting the right, and the balls are on the left side of the game board Passing through gates can also be sufficient. Each time the player is instructed to "right-hand", the player is bothersome. In addition, even if the player has made a left hit, if a notification is issued to instruct "right hit" every time the ball passes one ball through the through gate, the notification will be issued frequently, After all, it causes the player to feel bothersome.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, detecting that the ball has passed three balls in the second through gate 670 in 10 seconds normally A left strike instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to display on the third symbol display device 81 a strike direction instruction screen instructing a “left strike” which is advantageous to the player. In addition, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a definite change or in a short time, it is possible to play a game in a certain change or in a short time by detecting that three balls have passed through the first through gate 67 in 10 seconds. A right-handed command screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to display on the third symbol display device 81 a hitting direction commanding screen for instructing "right-handed driving" which is advantageous to the user. Thereby, although the player is firing the ball in the advantageous direction, a screen indicating the hitting direction is displayed by the fact that some balls are fired in the direction different from the advantageous direction. Can be suppressed. Further, even if the player has fired the ball in a direction different from the advantageous direction, it is possible to suppress the frequent display of the screen for instructing the hitting direction. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the interest to the game is impeded by the screen on which the player instructs the hitting direction.

  The first through gate passing flag 223 f and the second through gate passing flag 223 g are set to OFF at the stage of ending the right hit / left hit determination processing executed by the MPU 221.

  The time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate is a counter for counting an elapsed time after the ball passes through the first through gate 67. The second through gate passing time counter 223i is a counter for counting an elapsed time after the ball passes through the second through gate 670. The first through gate passage sphere number counter 223 j is a counter that counts the number of spheres that have passed through the first through gate 67 in 10 seconds. The second through gate passage sphere number counter 223 k is a counter that counts the number of spheres that have passed through the second through gate 670 in 10 seconds.

  The first through gate passing time counter 223h, the second through gate elapsed time counter 223i, the first through gate passing ball number counter 223j, and the second through gate passing ball number counter 223k are all executed when the power is turned on. In the initial value setting process (see S1810 in FIG. 22), 0 is set as the initial value. When the first through gate passing time counter 223h and the second through gate passing time counter 223i respectively have a value of 0, the value of 0 is maintained.

  On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 223h after passing the first through gate is 0, the first through gate passing flag 223f is turned on and the ball passes through the first through gate 67 while the gaming state is definite or time delay When it is detected, 1 is set in the time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate, and 1 is set in the first through gate passing sphere number counter 223j. In addition, when the value of the time counter 223i after passing the second through gate is 0, it is detected that the second through gate passing flag 223g is turned on and the ball passes through the second through gate 670 while the gaming state is normal. Then, the second through gate passing time counter 223i is set to 1 and the second through gate passing sphere number counter 223k is set to 1.

  After that, the first through gate passing flag 223 f is turned on and it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 67 while the gaming state is in a definite or changing state after that. And 1 are added. The second through gate passage ball number counter 223 j is incremented by one when the second through gate passage flag 223 g is turned on while the gaming state is normal and the passage of the ball through the second through gate 670 is detected. Ru.

  When the values after the first through gate passing time counter 223h and the second through gate passing time counter 223i become a number other than 0, the counter updating process executed by the MPU 221 every 1 millisecond (see FIG. 23). In S1912), an update process in which 1 is added is performed. When the first through gate passing time counter 223h and the second through gate passing time counter 223i become 10000, they are again set to 0, and thereafter the value is maintained at 0. Further, the first through gate passage sphere number counter 223 j is set to 0 in accordance with the time counter 22 h after the first through gate passage being set to 0. Similarly, the second through gate ball passing sphere number counter 223k is set to 0 at the same time as the time counter 22i after passing through the second through gate is set to 0.

  As a result, when the ball enters the first through gate 67 with the value being 0 while the gaming state is in a definite or changing state, the time counter 223h after passing the first through gate is 10000 milliseconds (10 seconds) Is counted, and during the 10 seconds, the number of spheres passing through the first through gate 67 is counted by the first through gate passing sphere number counter 223 j. Also, when the ball enters the second through gate 670 with the value being 0 while the gaming state is normal, the time counter 223i after passing the second through gate counts 10000 milliseconds (10 seconds), During the 10 seconds, the number of spheres passing through the second through gate 670 is counted by the second through gate passing sphere number counter 223k.

  Then, while the gaming state is certain or time-lapse, when the value of the first through gate passing ball number counter 223 j is “2”, the first through gate passing flag 223 f is turned on, and the ball passes through the first through gate 67. When the passage is detected, it means that three spheres have passed through the first through gate 67 in 10 seconds. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the player is "left-handed" despite the fact that it is in the middle of a definite change or a short-time, and a hit is issued to instruct the player to "right-turn" which is advantageous to the player A right-handed instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the direction instruction screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing "right hitting", so that the player can make a "right hitting" which is advantageous for the player during definite change or time Can be

  In addition, "0" is set to the time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate, and "0" to the ball counter 223j passing through the first through gate in response to transmission of the right-turning instruction screen display command.

  Also, when the gaming state is normal, when the value of the second through gate passing ball number counter 223k is "2", the second through gate passing flag 223k is turned on, and the ball has passed through the second through gate 670 Is detected, which means that three spheres have passed through the second through gate 670 in 10 seconds. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the player is "right-handed" despite the fact that the player is in the normal mode, and a batting direction instruction screen for instructing "left-handed" which is advantageous to the player during the normal A left strike instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Thus, the third symbol display device 81 displays a hitting direction indication screen for instructing "left hit", so that the player should be directed to "left hit" which is advantageous to the player during the normal operation. Can.

  In addition, "0" is set to the time counter 223i after passing through the second through gate and "0" to the sphere counter 223k passing through the second through gate in response to the transmission of the left hitting instruction screen display command.

  The RAM 223 additionally stores a main control command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, and a display received by the display control device 114 A display control command storage area (not shown) temporarily storing a command until processing corresponding to the command is performed, a fluctuation start flag (not shown) indicating that fluctuation presentation should be started in the on state, etc. have.

  Each of the main control command storage area and the display control command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data reading and writing are performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the main command determination process (see FIG. 24) of the audio lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the main control command storage area is read out, and the main command is executed. By the determination processing, the command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Further, when the audio reproduction control process (see FIG. 29) is executed by the audio lamp control device 113, the display command stored first among the unprocessed display commands stored in the display control command storage area is read. The audio data corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 indicated by the display command is read out from the audio data storage area 222a provided in the ROM 222 by the audio reproduction setting process, and the read audio data is reproduced audio A process of storing the data in the free channel area (one of the first to fourth channel areas) of the data storage area 223d is performed. Thus, it is possible to output from the voice output device 81 a voice that matches the display content of the third symbol display device 81.

  The fluctuation start flag is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the stop type command output from the main control device 110 is received (see S2004 in FIG. 24). Then, when the setting of the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is made, it is turned off (see S2102 in FIG. 25).

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display effect variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by the display command. be able to. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input / output port 237, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. ing.

  The voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input / output port 238, and the display control device 114 is a voice lamp control device for instructing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 determined by the voice lamp control device 113. At the same time as receiving from 113, a display command for notifying display contents to be actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 under the control of the display control device 114 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  The MPU 231, the program ROM 232, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are also connected to the input / output port 238 via the bus line 240. A video RAM 236 is connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, even if the pachinko machine 10 is another model in which the jackpot lottery probability and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot are different models, the model of the specification with exactly the same symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since the display control device 114 is a common part, cost reduction is achieved.

  The MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the command input from the audio lamp control device 113. The program ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The ROM 232 also has at least a display data table storage area 232a.

  The display data table storage area 232 a is an area in which a display data table prepared for each effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110 is stored. The display data table is an area in which is stored a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are stored in the effect corresponding to the display data table. The MPU 231 specifies the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, reads the display data table corresponding to the effect from the display data table storage area 232a, and reads the read The display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled in accordance with the display data table.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described. The display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the audio lamp control device 113, and for example, a variable effect, a demonstration effect, A display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect and the restart effect is prepared.

  The demonstration effect is an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next fluctuation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has passed since the one fluctuation effect was stopped, While the 3rd design which consists of the main design which does not attach the number of "0" to "9" is stopped-displayed, only a back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The finalized display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the stationary symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the finalization command (display determination command) from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 after the fluctuation effect. It is an effect to be displayed. For example, when the stop design is a design that is out of pattern, an effect that emphasizes the release is performed, and when the stop design is any of 15R probability big hit, 15R normal big hit, 4R probability big hit, each jackpot is emphasized A presentation is performed. The player can easily judge the game value given by the content of the stop symbol by visually recognizing the finalized display effect.

  The restart effect is performed when the confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 110 is not received even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the change effect indicated by the change pattern command. This is an effect of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an image in which the third symbol is vibrated (swayed) around the predetermined position. When the player visually recognizes that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the third symbol display is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the stop symbol is not determined at that time. Can be recognized.

  The display data table storage area 232a stores one display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect and the restart effect, respectively. The variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, is prepared for each table according to the combination of the variation effect pattern to be set and the stop symbol. In addition, as a display data table corresponding to a fixed display effect, one that displays off a symbol as a stop symbol and one that displays a definite variation big hit (15R positive variation big hit or 4R positive variation big hit) is usually a big hit (15R normal) The one to which the jackpot confirmation is displayed is prepared respectively.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the display data table for variation among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. Note that if the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), light in the image Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a person or a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variable display data table is constant, only the rear surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear surface image, is defined. This back type is one of back faces A to C corresponding to the stage (one of “sea stage”, “palace stage”, and “deep sea stage”) selected by the player operating frame button 22. Information is described that specifies whether to display a back image or to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C. Moreover, when specifying to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface type is also described together with information specifying which back surface image to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target . On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear surface image different from the rear surface A to C, the rear surface image to be displayed is specified from the rear surface type.

  In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, in any state corresponding to the back surface type and the back surface type It is possible to define display state information indicating whether to display the rear image. The rear image is displayed with the display range, the brightness, the color tone, and the like changing with the passage of time. The display state information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time since the rear surface image in the initial state is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time since the back surface image in the initial state indicated by the display state information is displayed.

  Further, the display state information is information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the image based on the display data table on the third symbol display device 81) is started. May be In this case, the MPU 231 starts drawing the image based on the display data table (or displaying the image based on the display data table on the third symbol display device 81) of the back image to be displayed for that frame. Based on the state of the back image displayed at the stage and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the display state information (or the display of the image on the third symbol display device 81) is started Identify.

  Furthermore, the display state information includes information indicating an elapsed time since the back surface image corresponding to the initial state is displayed according to the back surface type and drawing of an image based on the display data table (or an image based on the display data table It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of display on the third symbol display device 81), and the type information of the display state information (along with the back type and the display state information ( For example, it is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed, or the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 of the image based on the display data table) The information indicating whether the information indicates the elapsed time since the start of the display) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the display state information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), a unique identification number assigned to the third symbol is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. In this embodiment, a unique identification number for identifying each of the third symbols is given to each one of the third symbols. For example, the main symbol of "0" is attached with "0" as an identification number, the sub symbol between "0" and "1" is attached with "1" as an identification number, and the main of "1" The symbol "2" is attached to the symbol as an identification number, and "3" is attached to an auxiliary symbol between "1" and "2" as an identification number. Thus, different identification numbers are also attached to the sub-patterns in accordance with the position (between which main symbols the sub-patterns are inserted).

  In addition, as the symbol type information of the third symbol from the start of the change to the passage of a predetermined time, the identification information of the third symbol is not directly defined, but the stop of the change effect performed one before Offset information with the identification number of the symbol is described. The offset information is information representing the difference between the identification numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

  The offset information is defined as the symbol type information of the third symbol from the start of the change to the passage of a predetermined time. The display of the third symbol in the change effect is the change effect performed one time ago It is because it changes according to the stop symbol. From the start of the change to the passage of a predetermined time, as symbol type information in each address, the stop information of the change effect performed one time ago with the identification information of the third symbol to be displayed at the time corresponding to that address The difference (offset information) with the identification information of Thereby, change production can be started from the stop pattern in the last change production.

  In addition, as the symbol type information, from the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, the third symbol is fast for the predetermined time to be switched to the identification number of the third symbol to be actually displayed. It is set to be the time displayed in a fluctuating manner. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  In the display data table, in addition to the drawing content, the display content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from now on is defined at a part of the addresses. For example, in the case of displaying high-speed fluctuation, “high-speed fluctuation display” is defined as the display content, and in the case of displaying a mermaid character image, “mermaid character display” is defined as the display content, and the light emission effect image is displayed. In the case where the display is to be performed, "light emission effect display" is defined as the display content.

  When the establishment of the probability change reach is displayed, "certain probability change establishment" is defined as the display content, together with the type of the main symbol that has established the probability change reach. When the establishment of the normal reach is displayed, “normal reach established” is defined as the display content, together with the type of the main symbol that has established the normal reach. In the case of displaying double reach, since both positive change reach and normal reach are established, first, as the display content, "positive change reach established" is specified along with the type of the main symbol that establishes positive change reach. Furthermore, in addition to the types of main symbols that established normal reach, "normal reach established" is defined.

  The display content defined in the display data table is used to notify the audio lamp control device 113 of the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The start address of the display data table "0000H" describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 15) describes the data table. "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a display data table buffer 233a, which will be described later, provided in the work RAM 233, and the pointer 233b is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233b is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, next based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233b The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 13) to be described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller is instructed to draw the image. Thus, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233b, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the display content is defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233b, a display command representing the display content is generated according to the display content, and the display command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. As a result, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is notified to the sound lamp control device 113. In the audio lamp control device 113, control is performed to output, from the audio output device 226, audio that matches the display content notified by the display command.

  When a plurality of display contents are defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233b, a display command representing the display contents is generated in order from the display contents defined in advance, and the display command is used as an audio lamp control device Send to 113. As described above, when double reach is established in the third symbol display device 81, in the display data table, the probability change reach is first established as the display content at the address of the timing when the formation of the double reach is displayed "Probability change reach establishment" is specified together with the type of the main symbol, and then "normal reach establishment" is specified along with the type of the main symbol that establishes the normal reach. Therefore, when the double reach is established, the display control device 114 first transmits a reach display command notifying that the reach is established along with the type of reach symbol that has established the probability change reach, and then, immediately, the normal reach It is comprised so that the reach display command which notifies reach formation may be transmitted with the kind of reach pattern made to be established.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. The work RAM 233 at least includes a display data table buffer 233a, a pointer 233b, a drawing list area 233c, and a clock counter 233d.

  The display data table buffer 233a stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 113 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and a display data table corresponding to the effect mode is stored in the display data table storage area 223a. And the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233a. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233b one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233b. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 13) in which the contents of the image drawing instruction for the image is described is generated. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, effects corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a are displayed.

  If the display content is defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233b, a display command representing the display content is generated according to the display content, and the display command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. As a result, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is notified to the sound lamp control device 113. In the audio lamp control device 113, control is performed to output, from the audio output device 226, audio that matches the display content notified by the display command.

  The pointer 233 b is for designating an address at which the corresponding drawing content is to be acquired from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 a. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233b to 0, as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233a. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process for one frame is completed (FIG. 1), the value of the pointer 233b is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233b from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a each time such updating of the pointer 233b is performed, and the drawing list described later (See FIG. 13) Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  The drawing list area 233 c is an area for storing a drawing list that is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 a and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image of one frame.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 13, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third pattern (symbol 1, 1 ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite, such as a design.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite describes an address at which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the image controller 237 is a character described later provided in the character ROM 234. The image data of the sprite is acquired from the memory area designated by the address of the storage area 234a. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read out from the ROM 234 is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and is semitransparent according to the semitransparent value. Processing is performed, synthesis processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the method specified by the information according to filter specification information Above, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded on the video RAM 236 by the image controller 237.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233b and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern) Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage address of the data of the sprite (display object) is generated according to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Ru. That is, since the area of the character storage area 234a in which the image data of the sprite is stored is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 immediately determines the address at which the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type. The information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) The detailed information corresponding to the respective sprites is described in the order of the characters (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number pattern 1, holding ball number pattern 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. The clock counter 233 d is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 a. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233a. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process (FIG. Each time the display setting process (see S2603) is executed, the clock counter 233d is decremented by one. As a result, when the value of the time counter 233d becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  The character ROM 235 has a character storage area 235a in which image data of each sprite such as a symbol (a background symbol or a decorative symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. In the character storage area 235a, the above-described image data is stored as data in a compression format in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In the present embodiment, the image data before compression is composed of about 1024 Mbytes, and the image data of about 1024 Mbytes is compressed to about 768 Mbytes and stored in the character storage area 235a.

  The video RAM 236 is a memory having two frame buffer areas for storing an image of one frame displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The image controller 236 generates image data of one frame according to the drawing list and writes the image data to one frame buffer area of the video RAM 236 and also writes one frame of image data written to the other frame buffer area of the video RAM 236 Is read out, and the read out image data is output to the third symbol display device 81 through the output port 239 so that a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The image controller 237 reads the image data (image data of compressed format) of the sprite specified in the drawing list from the character storage area 235a in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, decompresses the image data, and then performs drawing. Processing is performed in accordance with the drawing information defined in the list, and the image data of the sprite is written in one frame buffer area of the video RAM at the display position coordinates specified in the drawing list. By decompressing, processing, and writing image data for all sprites defined in the drawing list, image data to be displayed in one frame is generated.

  The writing of one frame of image data into one frame buffer area and the reading of one frame of image data from the other frame buffer area are performed in parallel, and both complete in 20 milliseconds. Then, when reading of image data of one frame from the other frame buffer area is completed, reading of image data of one frame previously written from one of the frame buffer areas is subsequently performed. Image data for the next one frame is written to the frame buffer area of

  Thus, a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by alternately writing the image data and reading the image data of one frame buffer area and the other frame buffer area. It can be displayed.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 14 to 21. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated with power on and a main process executed after the start-up process, and activated periodically (in this embodiment, in a cycle of 4 milliseconds). There are timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. As the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be performed periodically are performed.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S1101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203. Similarly, when the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1 and the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S1103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 899, 99, 99, 250), each clears to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  Next, a process for performing display by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and a variation process of setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S1104), and then the first entry is performed. A start-up winning process accompanying the winning of the ball mouth 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is executed (S1105). Furthermore, through-gate passing processing is performed along with the passing of the sphere to the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 (S1106). The details of the fluctuation process, the start winning process, and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 16, 15, and 18, respectively.

  After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S1107), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S1108), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and firing the ball on condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process to determine the on / off of the The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, the start winning process (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S1105). The start winning process (S1105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and determines whether there is a winning (start winning) on the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, and starts If there is a winning, the holding processing of the values indicated by the various random number counters and the counting processing of the number of holding balls are executed.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S1201). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S 1201: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 holding ball number counter 203 d (the variation effect associated with the start winning for the first ball entrance 64 It is determined whether the number of holding balls NA is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S1202). And if there is no winning on the first entrance 64 (S 1201: No), or if there is a winning on the first entrance 64, the variation effect accompanying the starting winning for the first entrance 64 If the number of holding balls NA <4 (S1202: No), the process proceeds to S1206.

  On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first entrance 64 (S1201: Yes), and if the number of holding balls of the variable effect NA <4 associated with the starting entry to the first entrance 64 <S1202: Yes) , Special figure 1 The value of the ball number counter 203d (ball number NA) is added by 1 (S1203), and further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter Each value of CS1 is stored in the first area of the free space reserved areas of the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S1204).

  Next, the special figure 1 ball holding number command including the value of the ball holding number NA of the fluctuation effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64 updated by the processing of S1203 is set (S1205), Transfer to processing. The special figure 1 holding ball number command is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1601 of the main process (FIG. 20). In the voice lamp control device 113, the holding ball is held in the voice lamp control device 113 on the basis of the number of holding balls NA of the variation effect accompanying the winning of the first entrance 64 included in the special view 1 holding ball number command. Manage the number.

  In the subsequent processing of S11206, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the second ball entry port 640 (start winning) (S1206). Here, the ball entering the second ball inlet 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. And when it is determined that the ball has won the second entry ball opening 640 (S1206: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 203e (of the variation effect accompanying the starting entry to the second entry ball opening 640 It is determined whether or not the number of holding balls NB is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S1207). And if there is no winning on the second entrance 640 (S1206: No), or if there is a winning on the second entrance 640, the variation effect accompanying the starting winning for the second entrance 640 If the number of holding balls NB <4 (S1207: No), the start-up winning process is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if there is a winning to the second entrance 640 (S1206: Yes), and if the number of balls holding the change effect due to the starting entry to the second entrance 640 NB <4 (S1207: Yes) , Special figure 2 The value of the reserve ball number counter 203 (retention ball number NB) is incremented by 1 (S1208), and further, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter Each value of CS1 is stored in the first area of the vacant reserved areas of the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S1209).

  Next, the special figure 2 holding ball number command including the value of the holding ball number NB of the fluctuation effect associated with the start winning to the second entrance 640 updated by the processing of S1208 is set (S1210), and the start winning combination The process ends and returns to the timer interrupt process. The special figure 2 holding ball number command is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1601 of the main process (FIG. 20). In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the holding sphere number NB of the fluctuation effect accompanying the winning of the second entrance 640 included in the special figure 2 holding ball number command, the holding sphere in the voice lamp control device 113 Manage the number.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the variation process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing this variation process (S1104). This fluctuation process (S1104) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 1X4), and controls fluctuation display performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

  In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is currently occurring (S1301). The jackpot includes the middle of a jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B at the time of the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. If the result of the determination is that the jackpot is in progress (S1301: Yes), the present processing ends.

  If the jackpot is not inside (S1301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S1302), and the display manner of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changed If it is not inside (S1302: No), then it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is stopped (S1303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S1303: No), the present process is ended as it is. As a result, since the stop symbols in the variable effect are displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the stop symbols.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1303, if the predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation stop (S1303: Yes), it means that the fluctuation representation of the first symbol (the third symbol) can be started, so First, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 203e (the holding ball number NB of the fluctuation effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance 640) is larger than 0 (S1304). As a result, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 203e (the holding ball number NB) is larger than 0 (S1304: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 203e (the holding ball number NB 1) is subtracted (S1305), and the data stored in the special figure 2 reservation ball storage area 203b is subjected to shift processing (S1306).

  This data shift process shifts the data (each counter value) stored in the special figure 2 reserve first area of the special figure 2 reserve ball storage area 203b to the special figure reserve ball execution area 203c. Hold 2nd Area → Special Figure 2 Hold 1st Area, Special Figure 2 Hold 3rd Area → Special Figure 2 Hold 2nd Area, Special Figure 2 Hold 4th Area → Special Figure 2 Hold 3rd Area, etc. The data in each area (each counter value) is shifted.

  After the data shift process, the special figure type flag 203k is set to ON (S1307), and the fluctuation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) to be started from now comes along with the start winning to the second ball entry port 640 After indicating that it is to be executed, the variation start process (S1308) in the first symbol display device 37B is executed, and this process is ended. The change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As a result of the process of S1304, the value of the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 203e (holding ball number NB) is not larger than 0, that is, the holding ball number NB is 0, and the start winning prize to the second entrance 640 (S1304: No), then, the value of the special figure 1 holding ball number counter 203d (the holding ball of the fluctuation effect accompanying the start winning to the first ball entrance 64) It is determined whether the number NA) is larger than 0 (S1309).

  As a result, the value of the special figure 1 reserve ball number counter 203d (reserve ball number NA) is not larger than 0, that is, the reserve ball number NA is 0, and the reserve associated with the start winning to the first entrance 64 If it is determined that there is no such fluctuation effect (S1309: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 holding ball number counter 203d (holding ball number NA) is larger than 0 (S1309: Yes), the value of the special drawing 1 holding ball number counter 203d (holding ball number NA) Is decremented by 1 (S1310), and the data stored in the special figure 1 suspension ball storage area 203d is subjected to shift processing (S1311).

  This data shift process shifts the data (each counter value) stored in the special figure 1 reserve first area of the special figure 1 reserve ball storage area 203a to the special figure reserve ball execution area 203c, and the special figure 1 Hold 2nd area → Special figure 1 hold 1st area, Special figure 1 hold 3rd area → Special figure 1 hold 2nd area, Special figure 1 hold 4th area → Special figure 1 hold 3rd area, etc. The data in each area (each counter value) is shifted.

  After the data shift process, the special figure type flag 203k is set to OFF (S1312), and the fluctuation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) to be started from now comes along with the start winning to the first ball entrance 64 After indicating that it is to be executed, the process proceeds to the process of S1308, executes the variation start process in the first symbol display device 37A, and ends the present process.

  In this fluctuation processing, when it becomes a state where the fluctuation effect can be started (S1303: Yes), first, it is checked whether the value of the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S1304) ), Special figure 2 If the value of the ball number counter 203e is greater than 0, ie, if the variable effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance 640 is pending (S1304: Yes), the special figure 1 Regardless of the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d, that is, regardless of whether or not the fluctuation effect accompanying the start winning to the first ball entrance 64 is reserved, it is reserved in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Based on the obtained data (each counter value), the variation effect is started. As a result, the winning winning at the second entrance 640 is configured to be performed a big hit lottery with priority over the starting winning at the first entrance 64, and the variation effect is performed based on the big hitting lottery There is.

  If it is determined in the process of S1302 that the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S1302: Yes), it is determined whether a changing time has elapsed (S1313). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time is determined If it has not elapsed (S1313: No), the display of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is updated (S1314), and the present process is ended.

  In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37Ab of the first symbol display device 37A or the LEDs 37Bb of the first symbol display device 37B, for example, the LED currently lit is red in the period from the start of the change until the change time elapses. If so, turn off the red LED and turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and turn on the blue LED Then, a display mode is set in which the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

  The variation process is executed every two milliseconds, but if the illumination color of the LED is changed each time the variation process is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the illumination color of the LED. Therefore, the counter (not shown) is incremented by one each time the fluctuation processing is executed so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 200 when the counter reaches 200. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B has elapsed (S1313: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S1315). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by the variation start process (S1308) described later with reference to FIG.

  That is, according to the processing of S1308, whether or not a big hit is determined according to the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, and if it is a big hit, the first hit type counter A pattern that becomes a 15R probability variation jackpot (the maximum round number transitions to a high probability state after 15 round jackpots to a high probability state) by the value of C2 or a 4R probability variation jackpot (maximum round number is a high probability status after 4 round jackpots It is determined whether the symbol to be the transitioning probability variation jackpot) or the symbol to be the 15R normal jackpot (the maximum round number is a jackpot transitioning to a low probability state after 15 round jackpots).

  In the present embodiment, the blue LED is turned on when the jackpot becomes a 15R probability variation jackpot after the big hit, the red LED is lit when the 4R probability variation jackpot is hit, and the red LED and the blue LED when the 15R normal jackpot is hit Turn on the LED. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what is made to light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S1315, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect of the third symbol display device 81 is the LED of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B. A confirmation command is set in order to confirm in synchronization with the lighting (S1316), and the present process ends. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives this confirmation command, it transmits the confirmation command to the display control device 114 as it is. The third symbol display device 81 stops the variation when the variation time has elapsed, and the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined by receiving the confirmation command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the fluctuation start process (S1308) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S1308). This variation start process (S1308) is executed in the variation process (see FIG. 16) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and based on the values of the various counters stored in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, While performing a lottery of "big hit" or "displacement" (big hit lottery), the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

  In the change start process, first, a big hit lottery process is performed to determine whether or not a big hit based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c (S1401). Whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the game state at that time. As described above, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state (i.e., in the middle and in the short time), "7, 307, 582" associated with the "low probability state" in the jackpot random number table 202a. Is the jackpot random number value, and when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state (that is, in a definite change), "28, 58, 85 corresponding to the" high probability state "in the jackpot random number table 202a. , 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 596, 618, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836 , 866, 892 "is a jackpot random number value. In the process of S1301, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203c is compared with these jackpot random number values, and if they match, the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot Determine.

  Then, when it is determined as a big hit as a result of the process of S1401 (S1401: Yes), first, in order to set a display mode at the time of big hit, it is determined whether the special figure type flag is on (S1402) . And, if the special figure type flag is on (S1402: Yes), the fluctuation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) to be started from now is executed along with the start winning to the second entrance 640 The jackpot type table (see FIG. 8B) for the “second entrance” is set as the jackpot type table 202b for determining the jackpot type (S1403).

  On the other hand, when the special figure type flag is off (S1402: No), the fluctuation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) to be started from now is executed along with the start winning to the first ball entrance 64 The jackpot type table (see FIG. 8B) for the “first entrance” is set as the jackpot type table 202b for determining the jackpot type (S1404).

  Then, the jackpot type is determined on the basis of the jackpot type table set by the processing of S1403 or S1404 and the value of the first punch type counter C2 stored in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, and the jackpot type is determined. A corresponding jackpot display mode is set (S1405).

  That is, the jackpot type selected by the first jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table set by the processing of S1403 or S1404, ie, the maximum number of rounds transitions to a high probability state after jackpot of 15 rounds 15R probability variation jackpot The first entry based on whether the maximum number of rounds changes to a high probability state after 4 rounds of jackpots or whether the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots, 1st entry In the case of the variation effect accompanying the start winning to the ball mouth 64, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37Ab) of the first symbol display device 37A is set, and in the case of the variation effect accompanying the starting winning to the second ball entry port 640 The display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37Bb) of the first symbol display device 37B is set.

  In addition, the big hit type (15R positive variation big hit, 4R positive variation big hit, 15R normal big hit) is a stop type in order to stop and display the big hit symbols corresponding to various big hits with the third symbol display device 81 based on the transition state after the big hit. Set as

  Here, when the jackpot is to be a jackpot with the winning of the first ball entrance 64, the jackpot type is 1/4 by the jackpot type table for “first ball entrance” (see FIG. 8B). It will be a 15R probability variation jackpot with a probability of (= 25/100), a 15R regular jackpot with a probability of 1/4 (= 25/100), and a 4R probability variation jackpot with a 1/2 (= 50/100) probability.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot is to be a big hit along with the second entrance ball entry 640, the jackpot type is 1/2 according to the jackpot type table for "second entrance ball" (see FIG. 8 (b)) It will be a 15R probability variation jackpot with a probability of (= 50/100), a 15R regular jackpot with a probability of 1⁄4 (= 25/100), and a 4R probability variation jackpot with a 1⁄4 (= 25/100) probability.

  Thus, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of jackpot is that the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 in the case where the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 It is set higher than the case of the ball. On the other hand, as described above, the second ball entry port 640 is accompanied by the motorized role object 640a, and the ease with which the ball enters the second ball entry port 640 according to the open / close state of the motorized role object 640a is In contrast to the change, the first ball entrance 64 does not have a motorized part like the second ball entrance 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always enter the ball.

  Therefore, in many cases, the motorized accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the motorized entry is performed. Aim the ball 64 so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 toward the mouth 64 (so-called "left-handed"), and entering the first entrance 64 has many chances for a big hit lottery It is advantageous for the player to obtain and aim to be a big hit. On the other hand, during the definite change or time, the motorized accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in the open state and the second entrance 640 is likely to enter the ball, so to the second entrance 640 Direct the ball so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and entering the second entrance 640 aims to become a 15R positive variation hit jackpot Is advantageous to the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment emits a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the process of being changed, time is short, or is normal). You can change the way of “right-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) at the time of jackpot is determined (S1406). The determination of this variation pattern depends on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (normally, during a short time, during the definite variation), the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern table 202c for big hit (see FIG. 8C). It is done on the basis of When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S1406, in the case of the fluctuation effect accompanying the start winning to the first ball entrance 64, the display time of the first symbol display device 37A is set, and to the second ball entrance 640 In the case of the fluctuation effect accompanying the start winning combination, the display time of the first symbol display device 37B is set.

  If it is determined that the jackpot is not a jackpot in the process of S1401 (S1401: No), a display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S1407). In the process of S1307, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A in the case of the fluctuation effect accompanying the start winning to the first ball entrance 64, and the variation effect accompanying the start winning to the second ball entrance 640 In this case, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37B is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, As a stop type to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is a front or back reach, a reach other than the front or back, or a complete out. In the present embodiment, as described above, the table is set so that the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is different depending on whether the state is the high probability state or the low probability state. There is.

  Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of out of step is determined (S1408). This variation pattern is determined by the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (normally, during a short time, during a definite variation), the stop type set in the process of S1302, the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern for disengagement It is performed based on the table 202 d (disengaging (ordinary) fluctuation pattern table 202 d 1, disengaging (probable fluctuation) fluctuation pattern table 202 d 2). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S1305, in the case of the fluctuation effect accompanying the start winning to the first ball entrance 64, the display time of the first symbol display device 37A is set, and to the second ball entrance 640 In the case of the fluctuation effect accompanying the start winning combination, the display time of the first symbol display device 37B is set.

  When the process of S1406 or the process of S1408 is finished, the variation pattern type determined in the process of S1406 or S1408 is the special figure 1 (the variation effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64) or the special figure 2 ( The variation pattern command to be notified to the display control device 114 is set, including the special figure type information indicating whether or not the variation effect due to the start winning on the second entrance 640 (S1409).

  Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the stop type set in the process of S1405 or S1407 is set (S1410). The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 21). Ru.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S1106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S1106). The through gate passing process (S1106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and it is determined whether the ball has passed through the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670, and there is a passing of the ball. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4. Further, in the through gate passing processing, the first through gate passing command and the second through gate passing command for notifying the passing of the sphere in the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Do the processing for

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether the ball has passed the first through gate 67 (S1501). Here, the passage of the sphere through the first through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. When it is determined that the ball has passed the first through gate 67 (S1501: Yes), the first through gate is notified that the ball has passed the first through gate 67 to the audio lamp control device 113. A passage command is set (S1502). The first through gate passing command is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 21).

  Then, the value of the common drawing holding ball number counter 203f (the holding ball number M of the variation display of the second symbol) is acquired, and the value (M) of the common drawing holding ball number counter 203f is the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) It is determined whether it is less than (S1503).

  Whether the ball has not passed the first through gate 67 (S1501: No) or the value (M) of the general drawing reserve ball number counter 203f is less than 4 even if the ball has passed the first through gate 67 If not (S1503: No), the processing proceeds to S1506. On the other hand, if the ball passes the first through gate 67 (S1501: Yes), and the value (M) of the common drawing reservation ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S1503: Yes), the common drawing reservation ball number counter The value (M) of 203f is incremented by 1 (S1504). Then, the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired from the counter buffer of the value RAM 203, and stored in the first area of the vacant reservation areas (generally reserved first to fourth areas) of the common drawing reservation ball storage area 203i. (S1505), the process proceeds to S1506.

  In addition, in the processing of S1505, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f after addition in the processing is referred to in S1504, and if the value is 1, the first drawing common area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the general drawing reservation second area is the first, if the value is 3, the general drawing reservation third area is the first, and if the value is 4, the general drawing reservation fourth area is the first Area.

  In the process of S1506, it is determined whether the ball has passed the second through gate 670 (S1506). Here, the passage of the sphere through the second through gate 670 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, if it is determined that the ball has passed the second through gate 670 (S1506: Yes), the second lamp gate 113 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 that the ball has passed the second through gate 67. A passage command is set (S1507). The second through gate passage command is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 21).

  Then, the value of the common drawing holding ball number counter 203f (the holding ball number M of the variation display of the second symbol) is acquired, and the value (M) of the common drawing holding ball number counter 203f is the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) It is determined whether it is less than (S1508).

  Whether the ball has not passed the second through gate 670 (S1506: No), or even if the ball has passed the second through gate 670, the value (M) of the general drawing reserve ball number counter 203f is less than 4 If not (S1508: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes the second through gate 670 (S1508: Yes), and the value (M) of the common drawing reservation ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S1508: Yes), the common drawing reservation ball number counter The value (M) of 203f is incremented by 1 (S1509). Then, the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired from the counter buffer of the value RAM 203, and stored in the first area of the vacant reservation areas (generally reserved first to fourth areas) of the common drawing reservation ball storage area 203i. (S1510), this processing ends.

  In addition, in the process of S1510, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f after addition in the process is referred to in S1509, and if the value is 1, the first drawing area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the general drawing reservation second area is the first, if the value is 3, the general drawing reservation third area is the first, and if the value is 4, the general drawing reservation fourth area is the first Area.

  Next, referring to FIG. 19, it is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing this NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203.

  That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S 1551), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout and emission control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 20, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on.

  In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S1601). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1603).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1604). If it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process proceeds to S1611. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605), and if not stored (S1605: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S1611 also in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S1611. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the process of S1712 of FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1611, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1611). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start payout control of gaming balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization process (S1612, S1613) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S1612, S1613) of the RAM 203 is executed similarly when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1612), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1613). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1610.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S1605: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S1604: Yes) S1607: Yes), while holding the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S1608). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery for transmitting the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side back to the gaming state at the time of driving power supply interruption is transmitted (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  In the process of S1610, an interrupt is permitted (S1610). Then, the process shifts to the main processing described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As a summary, each process of S1701 to S1705 is executed as a periodic process of 4 ms cycle, and the counter update process of S1708 and S1709 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14), each control device on the sub side (peripheral control The external output processing to be sent to is executed (S1701).

  Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S1101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the acquired ball number. Send an award ball command. Further, the special drawing 1 holding ball number command and the special drawing 2 holding ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 15) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  Furthermore, with this external output processing, the large pattern opening 65a is opened and closed in the special game state at the time of the big hit, the fluctuation pattern command necessary for the fluctuation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command, and the confirmation command. When it is made to do, the command etc. which are necessary for displaying various screens on the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  When updating of the type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1703), and then, when it is in the special gaming state at the time of big hit, the large opening 65a In accordance with the opening / closing operation (closing condition), the large opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the large opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1704).

  Next, display control processing of the second symbol (normal symbol; for example, symbol "o" or "x") by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1705). Briefly explaining, when the value of the second random number counter C4 is reserved in the regular drawing reservation ball storage area 203i in accordance with the passage of the ball through the second entrance (through gate) 267, The value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the common drawing reservation first area of the common drawing reservation ball storage area 203i is shifted to the common drawing reservation ball execution area 203j. At this time, each reservation is as follows: General drawing reservation second area → General drawing reservation first area, General drawing reservation third area → General drawing reservation second area, General drawing reservation fourth area → General drawing reservation third area, etc. The value of the second random number counter in the area is also shifted.

  And if it matches with the random number value which matches the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the regular drawing reservation ball execution area 203j with the random value which becomes the win, it matches it with the random number which becomes the win The symbol of "○" is stopped and displayed after performing the variation display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device 83 as a hit of the second symbol (normal symbol), and after the stop display of the symbol of "○" The motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is operated to open for a predetermined time. On the other hand, as a result of the winning lottery, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the common drawing reservation ball execution area 203j does not match the hit random number value, the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is removed. 2 After the second symbol variation display is performed by the symbol display device 83, the symbol “x” is stopped and displayed. In this case, the motorized utility product 640a remains closed.

  In addition, the random number used as a win is set to different numbers depending on whether the gaming state is normal, time saving, and probability changing. In other words, the number of random numbers for which the game state is normal is 149, and the value is “5 to 153”. That is, when the value of the acquired second collision random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 153", it is determined that the game is in the normal state if the gaming state is in the middle. On the other hand, there are 250 random numbers that will be hit when the gaming state is in a short time or during a definite change, and the range is “1 to 250”. That is, when the value of the acquired second hit random number counter C4 is in the range of "1 to 250", it is determined to be hit if the gaming state is in the middle of a hour or during a definite change.

  In addition, the fluctuation time of the second symbol (normal symbol) is set to be shorter when the gaming state is in the middle or the middle of the game state than in the middle. Furthermore, the open time of the motorized accessory 640a when it is determined that the second symbol (normal symbol) has been hit is opened for a longer time in the short or middle game state than in the normal state.

  In this way, the probability of hitting the second pattern is set to be higher than that during normal change during and after a definite change. Also, as described above, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is also shorter than that in the normal, so the symbol of "o" becomes easy to be displayed in the variable display of the second symbol, and the motorized role piece 640a is in the open state ( Increase the number of times). On the other hand, the time during which the motorized accessory 640a is opened during the definite change and during the short time also becomes longer than the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entry port 640 compared to the normal time during definite variation and time.

  Here, as described above, even if the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the probability of becoming a big hit is a low probability state. The same is true even in the high probability state, but the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of jackpot is the first entrance when the ball enters the second entrance 640 It is set higher than when the ball enters 64. On the other hand, the first ball entry port 64 does not have a motorized part like the second ball entry port 640, and the ball can enter the ball at all times.

  Therefore, in many cases, the motorized accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the motorized entry is performed. Aim the ball 64 so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 toward the mouth 64 (so-called "left-handed"), and entering the first entrance 64 has many chances for a big hit lottery It is advantageous for the player to obtain and aim to be a big hit. On the other hand, during the definite change or time, the motorized accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in the open state and the second entrance 640 is likely to enter the ball, so to the second entrance 640 Direct the ball so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and entering the second entrance 640 aims to become a 15R positive variation hit jackpot Is advantageous to the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment emits a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the process of being changed, time is short, or is normal). You can change the way of “right-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  After the processing of S1705, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: No), the power failure monitoring circuit The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252 and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main processing (S1707) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1707: Yes), the process proceeds to S1701, and the above-described processes from S1701 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main processing (S1707: No), the first main processing is performed until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. (1) Update of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1708, S1709).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1708). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1702 (S1709).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1701 to S1705 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1706, if the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 19 has been executed, so that the process at the time of the power-off after S1710 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is prohibited (S1710), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1711). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1712), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1713), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1706 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1701 to S1705, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1708 and S1709 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1701. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S1701. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting the value to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1701. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 22, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S1801). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S1920 is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “temporary power failure”) in the current startup process (see FIG. 23). It is determined whether or not it is started during the execution of (S 1802). As described later with reference to FIG. 23, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1917 in FIG. 23), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S1920. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1920 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1802: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S1920 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1803).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1803: Yes), the process proceeds to S1804 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1803: No), the process proceeds to S1808.

  On the other hand, if the power-off process flag is on (S1802: Yes), the current start-up process is an audio lamp control during the execution of the power-off process of S1820 after an instantaneous power failure occurs. The MPU 221 of the device 113 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1804 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1804, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1804). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1805: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1806). Transfer to processing. By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1805: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1808, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1920 is performed (see S1919 in FIG. 23). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1920 is performed, the process of S1920 when the power-off flag is turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process of S1920 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1808: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1809), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1810). The permission is set (S1811), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S1808 when the power-off flag is off is that, for example, the current startup processing has been started after the power has been completely shut off, and thus the processing of S1804 to S1806 is performed. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1808: No), S1809, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1810, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1810), and interrupt permission is set. Then (S1811), the process proceeds to the main processing.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1809 is that, when the process of S1808 is reached via the processes of S1804 to S1806, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1804, If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this main processing.

  When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the process of S1901 was performed last time (S1901), and one millisecond If the above has not elapsed (S1901: No), the processing proceeds to S1913 without performing the processing of S1902 to S1912.

  In the process of S1901, the process of determining whether 1 millisecond has elapsed is a process relating to display (rendering) in S1902-S912, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the variation display process of S1913, the right hitting / left hitting determination process of S1914, the main command determination process of S1915, and the sound reproduction setting process of S1916 in a short cycle.

  By executing the main command determination process of S1915 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110. By executing the audio reproduction setting process of S1916 in a short cycle, omission of reception of the display command transmitted from the display control device 114 is prevented, and the third indicated by the display command without delay based on the display command. It is possible to set sound reproduction according to the display content of the symbol display device 81.

  By performing the fluctuation display process of S1913 in a short cycle, it is possible to perform the setting regarding the fluctuation effect without delay based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command received by the main command determination process. In addition, by executing the right-handed-and-left-handed determination process of S1914 in a short cycle, the player can be determined without delay based on the first through gate pass command or the second through gate pass command received by the main command determination process. The third symbol display device 81 can display a batting direction instruction screen instructing "right-handed" or "left-handed".

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1901 (S1901: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1903 to S1916 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 ( S1902). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1909 described later (S1903), and then the power on notification process is executed (S1904). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1905 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S1905, a customer waiting effect is executed (S1905). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to 114.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring and rendering process is executed (S1907). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the high speed fluctuation period, processing for changing the stage is performed, and the rear surface image change for the display control device 114 is changed instead of the frame button operation command. Set the command. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when the advance notice character appears at the start of the variable display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during reach production produces a sense of expectation for the jackpot. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be set as a decision button for selecting one reach effect among a plurality of reach effects. When the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1907 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1909), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1910). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, in accordance with the display command from the display control device 113 so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, the reproduced sound data storage area 223d is processed in the sound reproduction setting process (S1916) described later. The audio data stored in the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to d4 are respectively decoded, the audio of all the decoded channels is mixed, and a sound is output from the audio output device 226. Further, when the output of the alarm sound is set, the output pattern of the alarm sound is set by the sound editing / output processing, and the alarm sound is output from the voice output device 226.

  After the process of S1910, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1911). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1909 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing / output processing of S1910 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the process of S1911, the counter updating process is executed (S1912), and the process shifts to the process of S1913. In the counter updating process, the various counters used by the MPU 221 are updated. For example, updating of the time counter after passing the first through gate 223 h and the time counter after passing through the second through gate 223 i is performed in the process of S 1912. Update of time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate and time counter 223i after passing through the second through gate is maintained at 0 when the value is 0, and 1 when the value is 1 to 9999. Is added, and if its value is 10000, it is performed by initializing it to 0.

  The first through gate passing time counter 223h is set to 1 when the first through gate pass command is received from the main control unit 110, and the second through gate after pass time counter 223i is second from the main control unit 110. 1 is set when a through gate passage command is received. By updating the time counter after passing the first through gate 223h and the second through gate 223i by the counter updating process executed every one millisecond, for each of the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670, It is possible to count the time until 10 seconds have passed since the ball passed.

  In the counter updating process (S1912), the first through gate passing sphere number counter 223j is set to 0 in accordance with the time counter 22h after passing through the first through gate being set to 0. Similarly, the second through gate passage sphere number counter 223 k is set to 0 in accordance with the setting of the time counter 22 i after passing through the second through gate to 0.

  In the process of S1913, in order to display the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command are generated based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110 Then, the variable display processing, which is processing set to transmit the generated commands to the display control device 114, is executed. Details of this variation display process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the variable display process, the right hit / left hit determination process is executed (S1914). In the right-handed-left-hand judging process, when it is judged that the player is hitting left when the gaming state is in a short time or in a definite change, a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing the player to hit the right is displayed. The third symbol display device 81 is displayed, and when it is determined that the player is hitting the right when the gaming state is normal, the bat direction indication screen for instructing the player to strike the left in an advantageous manner is displayed third It is processing to be displayed on the symbol display device 81. The details of the right hitting left hitting determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27.

  Next, main command determination processing is performed to perform processing in accordance with the command received from the main control apparatus 110 (S1915). Details of the main command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the main command determination process, in accordance with the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice reproduction setting process is performed to set the voice data matching the display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the reproduction voice data storage area 223d. (S1916). The audio data set in S1916 is decoded by the sound editing / output processing in S1910, and the sound is reproduced from the audio output device 226. Details of the sound reproduction setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1916 ends, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1917). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1917 (S1917: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1919), and the power-off process is executed (S1920). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1921), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the occurrence information of the power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1917 (S1917: No), it is determined based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1918) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1918: No), the process returns to S1901, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1916: Yes), the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the main command determination process (S1915) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the main command determination process (S1915). The main command determination process (S1915) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. And perform processing corresponding to the received command. The details of the main command determination process will be described below.

  In the main command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 is read out from the main control command storage area provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed, and the variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control apparatus 110 Is determined (S2001). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2001: Yes), the fluctuation pattern type of fluctuation effects to be started from the fluctuation pattern command (normal reach various, super reach various, special reach various, short gap, long Indicates that the variation effect is associated with the start winning to the first entrance 64 or with the starting winning to the second entrance 640 (S2002). The special figure type information is extracted from the variation pattern command (S2002), and the process returns to the main process.

  The variation pattern type and the special view type information extracted here are stored in the RAM 223. The fluctuation pattern type is used when setting a display fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the fluctuation effect and the fluctuation pattern type in the below-mentioned fluctuation display processing (see FIG. 25). . In addition, in the case of the special view type information, in the variation display process, when one of the special figure 1 holding ball number counter 223a or the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 223b is decremented by 1 along with the start of the fluctuation effect. Is referred to.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S2001: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2003). When it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S2003: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is set to ON (S2004), and the stop type (15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, 15R indicated by the stop classification command) Usually, a big hit, complete removal, front and back outreach, reach other than out of front and back is extracted and stored in the RAM 233 (S2005). Then, the main command determination process ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  By setting the fluctuation start flag to ON, the start of the fluctuation effect is set, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the fluctuation effect. In addition, the stop type determines the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect to be started in the fluctuation display process (see FIG. 25) described later, and displays the stop symbol in order to stop and display the determined stop symbol. Used when setting type command.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S2003: No), it is then determined whether the special figure 1 holding ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S2006). When it is determined that the special figure 1 holding ball number command has been received (S2006: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110 included in the special figure 1 holding ball number command (ie, , The number of balls held for the variable effect due to the start winning to the first entrance 64, which is held in the main control unit 110, is extracted, and this is sent to the special figure 1 held ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control unit 113. Store (S2007).

  Then, the value of the special figure 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the value of the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 223b are added, and the total value is the number of fluctuation effects of the third symbol held in the main control device 110 And a command for holding balls for display to be notified to the display control unit 114 (S2008), the main command determination process is ended, and the process returns to the main process. The display holding ball number command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display holding ball number command, the holding ball number symbol (● symbol) for the holding ball number indicated by the display holding ball number command is the holding display area of the third symbol display device 81 Display on Db.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 holding ball number command has not been received (S2006: No), it is then determined whether the special figure 2 holding ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S2009) ). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 holding ball number command has been received (S2009: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 203e of the main control unit 110 included in the special figure 2 holding ball number command (ie , The number of balls held for the change effect due to the start winning to the second entrance 640 held by the main control unit 110) is extracted, and this is sent to the special figure 2 held ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control unit 113. Store (S2010). Then, the process proceeds to S2008, and as described above, the value of the special figure 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the value of the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 223b are added up, and the total value (total number of holding balls) Is set for notifying the display control unit 114 (S2008), the main command determination process is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 reservation ball number command has not been received (S2009: No), it is then determined whether the second through gate passage command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2011) . Then, when it is determined that the second through gate passage command has been received (S2011: Yes), it means that the ball has passed through the second entrance 640, so the second through gate passage flag 223g is set to ON. Then (S2012), the main command determination process ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second through gate passage command is not received (S2011: No), it is then determined whether the first through gate passage command is received from the main control device 110 (S2013). When it is determined that the first through gate passage command has been received (S2013: Yes), this means that the ball has passed through the first entrance 64, so the first through gate passage flag 223f is set to ON. Then (S2014), the main command determination process ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first through gate passage command has not been received (S2013: No), next, it is determined whether or not the confirmation command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2015). Then, when it is determined that the confirmation command has been received (S2015: Yes), first, a display confirmation command for setting and displaying the fluctuation effect of the third symbol is set (S2016). The display confirmation command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display confirmation command, the display control device 114 displays the fluctuation effect of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81 with the stop symbol notified in advance by the display stop type command.

  After the process of S2016, it is determined from the stop type extracted by the process of S2005 and stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the stop symbol determined and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a probability change jackpot (S2017). Then, in the case of a definite variation jackpot (S2017: Yes), 0 is set in a time saving number counter (not shown) (S2018). In the present embodiment, the game state is set in a short time while 100 times of the variable effects are performed after the big hit. The time reduction counter is usually used to count 100 times of fluctuation effects after a big hit, and is normally set to "100" when it is a big hit, and the deviation is fixedly displayed in the subsequent change effects. Is decremented by one. Then, when the time saving number counter becomes 0, the gaming state is returned from the time saving mode to the normal mode. In addition, if the normal big hit again during the short time, by setting "100" again to the time reduction number counter, the number of fluctuation effects for which the time saving state is continued is returned to 100 times again. In addition, if the probability variation big hit occurs in the short time, the time reduction number counter is set to 0. In this case, the gaming state is in the process of being changed, and the changing of the game is maintained until the next jackpot is established.

  After the processing of S2018, the probability variation time short flag 223e is set to ON (S2021) to indicate that the gaming state is in probability variation. Then, the main command determination process ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  As a result of the process of S2017, when it is determined that the stop symbol decided and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not a definite variation jackpot (S2017: No), then, the stop symbol that is decidedly displayed is usually a big hit or not It is determined whether or not (S2019). As a result, if it is a normal jackpot (S2019: Yes), 100 is set to the time saving number counter (S2020). Thereby, 100 times of fluctuation effects are counted after the game state is in the middle of the hour, and the game state is changed from the middle of the hour to the normal state when the variable effects which are out are repeated 100 times. After the processing of S2020, the probability variation time short flag 223e is set to ON (S2021) to indicate that the gaming state is in the middle of a short time. Then, the main command determination process ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  As a result of the process of S2019, when it is determined that the stop symbol fixedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not a normal big hit (S2017: No), the stop symbol is a detached symbol. Therefore, first, it is determined whether the time reduction number counter is larger than 0 (S2022), and if the time reduction number counter is 0 (S2022: No), the main command determination process is ended and the process is returned to the main process . On the other hand, if the time saving counter is larger than 0 (S2022: Yes), the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (S2023), and it is determined whether the time saving counter after subtraction is 0 (S2024).

  As a result, when the time reduction number counter after subtraction becomes 0 (S2023: Yes), since the variation effect which is out of play is repeated 100 times after the game state is in time reduction, the probability change time short flag 223e is turned off. Is set (S2025) to indicate that the gaming state is normal. Then, the main command determination process ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S2023, if the time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0 (S2023: No), the main command determination process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the main process. As a result, the gaming state is maintained for a short time.

  If it is determined as a result of the process of S2015 that the confirmation command has not been received (S2015: No), it is then determined whether another command has been received from the main control apparatus 110 (S2026). Then, if another command has not been received (S2026: No), the main command determination process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if another command is received (S2026: Yes), processing according to the other command is executed (S2027), the main command determination processing is ended, and the processing returns to the main processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the variation display process (S1913) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this variation display process (S1913). This fluctuation display process (S1913) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, displays fluctuation effects in the third symbol display device 81 In order to make it possible, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command are generated based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control unit 110, and the generated display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command are generated. Is set to transmit to the indication control device 114.

  In the fluctuation display process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2101). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, off) (S2101: No), since the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are not received from main controller 110, this is the case. The variable display process is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is on (S2101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S2102), and then, according to the fluctuation pattern command in the process of S2102 in the main command determination process (see FIG. 24). The variation pattern type (normal reach variety, super reach variety, special reach variety, short out, long out) in the extracted variation effect and the stop type in the change effect extracted from the stop type command in the process of S2105 , And acquired from the RAM 223 (S2103).

  Then, based on the value of the counter for determining the detailed variation pattern provided in the RAM 223 and the value of the counter for determining the stop symbol, and based on the variation pattern type and the stop type acquired from the processing of S2103, Change patterns and stop symbols are determined (S2104). Here, only the fluctuation time is specified as the fluctuation pattern type notified from the main control device 110 by the fluctuation pattern command. However, various detailed fluctuation patterns prepared for the fluctuation time by this S2104 are specified. One of the variation patterns is selected, and the selected variation pattern is determined as a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed from now on. The stop type notified from the main control unit 110 by the stop type command indicates rough stop types such as 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, completely out, back and forth outreach, reach other than back and forth out Only by the processing of this S2104, the stop design which suits the stop classification is decided.

  When the detailed variation pattern is determined in the process of S2104, then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the determined detail variation pattern to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is displayed control device 114. It sets to transmit to (S2105). Further, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop symbol determined by the process of S2104 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2106).

  The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display apparatus 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Start the display control of the fluctuation effect. In addition, in the display control device 114, when the fluctuation effect started by the display fluctuation pattern command is determined and displayed by receiving the display stop classification command, the stop symbol indicated by the display stop classification command is displayed. indicate.

  Next, according to the setting of the display fluctuation pattern command, the sounding ball control device 113 manages according to the holding ball being consumed (that is, the setting of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the holding ball is performed) In order to reduce the number of balls held, first, based on the special view type information extracted in the process of S2002, whether or not the fluctuation effect to be started this time is associated with the start winning to the first entrance 64, ie, special view 1 It is judged whether or not it is a fluctuation due to (S2107), and if it is a fluctuation according to the special figure 1 (S2107: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 holding ball number counter 223a is decremented by 1 (S2108). On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S2107, when it is determined that the fluctuation effect to be started this time is associated with the start winning to the second entrance 640, that is, it is determined to be a fluctuation due to the special view 2 (S2107: No) The value of the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 202b is decremented by 1 (S2109).

  Then, after the processing of S2108 or S2109, the value of the special figure 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the value of the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 223b are added, and the sum value is held by the main control device 110 A display ball holding number command for display to be notified to the display control device 114 is set as the number of variation effects of the third symbol (S2110), and the variation display processing is ended, and the processing returns to the main processing.

  The display holding ball number command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display holding ball number command, the holding ball number symbol (● symbol) for the holding ball number indicated by the display holding ball number command is the holding display area of the third symbol display device 81 Display on Db.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26 and FIG. 27, the right hitting / left hitting determination processing (S1914) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIGS. 26 and 27 are flowcharts showing the right hit / left hit determination process (S1914). This variation display process (S1913) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, when the gaming state is in the middle If it is determined that the player is hitting the left, a hit direction indication screen for instructing the player to hit the right is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the gaming state is normal. When it is determined that the player is hitting the right, this is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display a hitting direction indication screen for instructing the player to strike the left in an advantageous manner.

  First, with reference to FIG. 26, the right hit / left hit determination process (S1914) will be described. In the right-handed-left-hand judging process (S1914), first, it is judged whether or not a big hit (during special game state) (S2201), and if a big hit (S2201: Yes), the first through gate passing flag 223f and After the second through gate passage flag 223g is reset to OFF (S2219), the right hitting / left hitting determination processing is ended.

  That is, in the case of a big hit, the right hit / left hit determination process is not performed. In the case of a big hit, regardless of whether the gaming state immediately before the big hit of the pachinko machine 10 is a definite change or a time-shortening, or a normal inside, the fluctuation effect that has become a big hit is also due to the start winning to the first entrance 64. Depending on whether it is due to the start winning to the second ball entrance 640, either the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 opens and closes. Do. Therefore, it is possible to show the player in which direction the ball should be fired by the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of a big hit, the right hitting / left hitting determination is not performed, and the present process is ended.

  However, when the specified winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened and closed in the middle of a big hit, when it is determined that the player is hitting the right, the specific winning opening of the first variable winning device 65 If the third symbol display device 81 displays a hitting direction indication screen instructing the left to easily hit the ball on 65a, and the specified winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is opened and closed, the player will hit the left Even if it is determined that the third symbol display device 81 displays a hitting direction indication screen instructing the specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 to hit the ball easily with a right, even if it is determined that Good.

  As a result of the process of S2201, when it is not in the jackpot (S2201: No), it is then determined whether the probability variation time short flag 223e is off (S2202). As a result, if the probability variation time short flag 223e is off (S2202: Yes), the gaming state is normal. Therefore, in order to determine whether the player is hitting the right, first, it is determined whether the second through gate passage flag 223g is on (S2203). As a result, if the second through gate passing flag 223g is off (S2203: No), the first through gate passing flag 223f and the second through gate passing flag 223g are reset to be off (S2219), and the right turn left The hit determination processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2203 that the second through gate passage flag 223g is on (S2203: Yes), it is then determined whether the second through gate passage time counter 223i is 0 or not (S2204). As a result, if the second through gate passing time counter 223i is 0 (S2204: Yes), the second through gate passing time counter 223i is set to 1 and the second through gate passing sphere number counter 223k. 1 is set (S2205). Then, the first through gate passing flag 223f and the second through gate passing flag 223g are reset to OFF (S2219), and the right hit / left hit determination process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S2204 that the second through gate passing time counter 223i is not 0 (S2204: No), it is then determined whether the second through gate passing sphere number counter 223k is 2 (S2207). ). As a result, if the second through gate ball number counter 223k is not 2 but 1 (S2207: No), 1 is added to the second through gate ball number counter 223k (S2210), and the first through gate is passed. After the flag 223f and the second through gate passage flag 223g are reset to OFF (S2219), the right hit / left hit determination processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when the value of the second through gate passage sphere number counter 223k is 2 as a result of the process of S2207 (S2207: Yes), the process proceeds to S2208. Here, the update of the time counter 223i after passing the second through gate is performed every 1 millisecond by the processing of S1912 of the main processing (see FIG. 23) as described above, and the value is maintained at 0 when the value is 0. On the other hand, when the value is 1 to 9999, 1 is added to the value, and when the value is 10000, initialization is performed to 0.

  Therefore, it is determined that the second through gate passing time counter 223i is not 0 by the processing of S2204 (S2204: No), and the value of the second through gate passing sphere number counter 223k is 2 by the processing of S2207. If it is judged (S2207: Yes), it means that three balls passed through the second through gate 670 on the right side of the game board in a short time of 10 seconds or less. Therefore, in this case, it can be determined that the player may be hitting the right. On the other hand, when the gaming state is normal, the left strike is advantageous for the player as described above.

  Therefore, in this case, a left strike instruction screen display command to be transmitted to the display control device 114 is set (S2208). The display control device 114 receives the left hitting instruction screen display command to display a hitting direction instructing screen for instructing "left hitting" shown in FIG. 10A on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to cause the player to "beat" the ball, and the player can enjoy the game in an advantageous state.

  After the process of S2208, the second through gate passing time counter 223i is set to 0, and the second through gate passing sphere number counter 223k is set to 0 (S2209), and the first through gate passing flag 223f and the second After the through gate passage flag 223g is reset to OFF (S2219), the right-handed / left-handed judgment processing is ended.

  When it is determined that the probability variation time short flag 223e is on as a result of the processing of S2202 (S2202: No), it is determined that the gaming state is in the process of variation or not. Therefore, the process proceeds to the process of S2211 in FIG.

  In the process of S2211, it is first determined whether the first through gate passage flag 223f is on in order to determine whether the player has made a left hit (S2211). As a result, if the first through gate passage flag 223f is off (S2211: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S2219 in FIG. 26, and the first through gate passage flag 223f and the second through gate passage flag 223g are reset off. After that (S2219), the right hit / left hit determination process is ended.

  On the other hand, returning to FIG. 27, if the first through gate passage flag 223f is on as a result of the processing of S2211 (S2211: Yes), then it is determined whether the time counter 223h after first through gate passage is 0 or not. (S2212). As a result, if the first through gate passing time counter 223h is 0 (S2212: Yes), the first through gate passing time counter 223h is set to 1 and the first through gate passing sphere number counter 223j is 1 is set (S2213). Then, the process shifts to the processing of S2219 in FIG. 26, and the first through gate passing flag 223f and the second through gate passing flag 223g are reset to OFF (S2219), and the right hitting left hitting judging process is ended.

  Referring back to FIG. 27, as a result of the processing of S2212, if the time counter 223h after passing the first through gate is not 0 (S2212: No), then whether or not the first through gate passing sphere number counter 223j is 2 or not. (S2215). As a result, if the first through gate ball number counter 223j is not 2 but 1 (S2215: No), 1 is added to the first through gate ball number counter 223j (S2218), as shown in FIG. After shifting to the processing, the first through gate passing flag 223f and the second through gate passing flag 223g are reset to OFF (S2219), and the right hit / left hit determination processing is ended.

  On the other hand, referring back to FIG. 27, when the value of the first through gate ball passing counter 223j is 2 as a result of the processing of S2215 (S2215: Yes), the processing proceeds to S2216. Here, as described above, the update of the time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate is performed every one millisecond by the processing of S1912 of the main processing (see FIG. 23), and the value is maintained at 0 when the value is 0. On the other hand, when the value is 1 to 9999, 1 is added to the value, and when the value is 10000, initialization is performed to 0.

  Therefore, it is determined that the time counter 223h after passing the first through gate is not 0 by the process of S2212 (S2212: No), and the value of the first through gate passing sphere number counter 223j is 2 by the process of S2215. If it is determined (S2215: Yes), it means that three balls have passed through the first through gate 67 on the left side of the game board in a short time of 10 seconds or less. Therefore, in this case, it can be determined that the player may be hitting left. On the other hand, when the gaming state is in a definite or changing state, as described above, the right hitting is advantageous for the player.

  Therefore, in this case, a right-handed instruction screen display command for transmission to the display control device 114 is set (S2216). The display control device 114 receives the right strike instruction screen display command to display a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing "right strike" shown in FIG. 10B on the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible to cause the player to "right strike" the ball, and the player can enjoy the game in an advantageous state.

  After the processing of S2216, 0 is set in the time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate, 0 is set in the first through gate passing sphere number counter 223j (S2217), and the process shifts to the processing of S2219 in FIG. After the first through gate passage flag 223f and the second through gate passage flag 223g are reset to OFF (S2219), the right-handed / left-handed judgment processing is ended.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 28, the operation and effect of the right hitting / left hitting determination process will be described. FIG. 28 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the passage of the ball of the first through gate 67 and the display of a batting direction instruction screen instructing "right strike" when the gaming state is in a definite or time-saving state. , (A) is a diagram showing an example where two spheres pass through the first through gate 67 in 10 seconds, and (b) shows the first through gate 67 in 10 seconds. It is the figure which showed the example when a ball | bowl passed at least 3 balls.

  Although FIG. 28 shows the case where the gaming state is in a definite or changing state, in the case where the gaming state is in a normal state, the passing of the ball of the second through gate 67 and the batted ball instructing "left strike" The relation with the display of the direction indication screen is also the relation between the passage of the ball of the first through gate 67 and the display of the hitting direction indication screen instructing the “right strike” when the gaming state is in a definite or changing state. The description is omitted because it is the same.

  In FIGS. 28A and 28B, when the first through gate passage flag 223g is turned on, it means that the sphere has passed through the first through gate 67. In addition, when the output of the right-handed instruction screen display command is “YES”, it means that a batting direction instruction screen instructing “right-handed” is displayed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the case where the game state is definite or changing, if only two balls pass the first through gate 67 in 10 seconds, first, as shown in FIG. When the first ball passes the first through gate 67 when the counter 223i is zero, the first through gate ball number counter 223i is counted up to one. When the second ball passes the first through gate 67 within 10 seconds after the count-up, the first through gate ball number counter 223i is counted up to two. However, when 10 seconds pass after the first through gate passing ball number counter 223i is counted up, the first through gate passing ball number counter 223i is also processed by the counter updating process (S1912) of the main process (see FIG. 23). Initialized to 0. Thus, when only two balls pass the first through gate 67 in 10 seconds, a right-handed command screen display command is not output to the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 , A hit direction instruction screen for instructing “right strike” can be hidden.

  On the other hand, if three or more balls pass through the first through gate 67 in 10 seconds in the case where the gaming state is in a definite or changing state, as shown in FIG. When the gate passing sphere number counter 223i is 0, if the first sphere passes the first through gate 67, the first through gate passing sphere number counter 223i is counted up to 1. When the second ball passes the first through gate 67 within 10 seconds after the count-up, the first through gate ball number counter 223i is counted up to two. Furthermore, if the third ball passes the first through gate 67 before the first through gate passing ball number counter 223i has not counted 10 seconds from the count-up, S2216 (FIG. By the process of the above, the right-handed instruction screen display command is output to the display control device 114. Thus, if three or more balls pass through the first through gate 67 in 10 seconds while the gaming state is in a definite or changing state, it is determined that the player has made a left strike, and the third symbol In the display device 81, it is possible to display a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “right strike”.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, for example, when it is advantageous for the player to hit the right, the player can hit the left only by one ball passing through the through gate on the left side of the game board. There was a case in which it was judged that they were doing, and a notification was issued to instruct "right-handed". However, it is quite possible that some balls flow down the left side of the game board, even if the player is hitting the right, and the balls are on the left side of the game board Passing through gates can also be sufficient. Each time the player is instructed to "right-hand", the player is bothersome. In addition, even if the player has made a left hit, if a notification is issued to instruct "right hit" every time the ball passes one ball through the through gate, the notification will be issued frequently, After all, it causes the player to feel bothersome.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a definite or changing state, by detecting that three balls have passed through the first through gate 67 in 10 seconds, the indeterminate state or a while The display control unit 114 transmits a right-handed command screen display command so as to display on the third symbol display device 81 a hit direction instruction screen for instructing "right-handed hit" which is advantageous to the player. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, the game is normally played in the normal state by detecting that three balls have passed through the second through gate 670 in 10 seconds. A left strike instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to display on the third symbol display device 81 a strike direction instruction screen instructing "left strike" which is advantageous to the user. Thereby, although the player is firing the ball in the advantageous direction, a screen indicating the hitting direction is displayed by the fact that some balls are fired in the direction different from the advantageous direction. Can be suppressed. Further, even if the player has fired the ball in a direction different from the advantageous direction, it is possible to suppress the frequent display of the screen for instructing the hitting direction. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the interest to the game is impeded by the screen on which the player instructs the hitting direction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the audio reproduction setting process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this sound reproduction setting process (S1916). As described above, in the sound reproduction setting process (S1916), the sound data matching the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is set in the reproduction sound data storage area 223d according to the display command received from the display control device 114. It is a process. Further, in this voice reproduction setting process, when two reach voices are being reproduced, processing is also performed to stop the reproduction of the reach voice reproduced most recently (normal reach voice whose reproduction has been started later).

  In this sound reproduction setting process, first, it is determined whether the value of the reach sound reproduction counter 223c is 2 or not (S2301). The reach voice playing counter 223c counts the number of reach voices being played. If the value of the reach voice playing counter 223c is not 2 but 0 or 1 (S2301: No), that is, if the reach voice is not played or only one reach voice is played, then the RAM 223 Of the unprocessed commands, the first display command received from the display control device 114 is read out from the display control command storage area provided in and analyzed, and it is judged whether or not the reach display command has been received (S2302).

  Then, if the reach display command has not been received (S2302: No), it is further determined whether or not another display command has been received (S2307). As a result, when another display command is received (S2307: Yes), voice data corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 indicated by the received display command is output from the voice data storage area 222 It is read out and set as the free channel area of the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to 223d4 of the reproduction audio data storage area 223d, and the reproduction of the audio is started (S2308). Then, the reach voice playing counter 223c is initialized to 0 (S2309), and the voice playing setting process is ended. If it is determined as a result of the process of S2307 that no other display command has been received (S2307: No), the voice reproduction setting process is ended as it is.

  When the reach display command is received as a result of the process of S2302 (S2302: Yes), the reach voice data corresponding to the reach symbol shown by the reach display command is the 0th symbol of the voice data storage area 222a. Normal reach voice data 222a0, first symbol probability change reach voice data 222a1, second symbol normal reach voice data 222a2, ... read out from the ninth probability change reach voice data 222a9, the first to the first of the reproduction voice data storage area 223d The free channel areas of the fourth channel areas 223d1 to 223d4 are set, and reproduction of reach sound is started (S2303). Then, 1 is added to the reach voice reproducing counter 223c (S2304), and the voice reproduction setting process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the reach voice reproducing counter 223c is 2 as a result of the process of S2301 (S2301: Yes), since the two reach voices are being reproduced, the reach reproduced most recently The reproduction of the voice, that is, the reach sound that has started reproduction last is stopped (S2305). Then, the value of the reach voice playing counter 223c is initialized to 0 (S2306), and the voice playing setting process is ended.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 30, an operation and an effect by executing the sound reproduction setting process will be described. FIG. 30 is an explanatory view for explaining reproduction of reach voice when double reach is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG.

  In the third symbol display device 81, after the high-speed fluctuation of the fluctuation effect is displayed, the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped from the low speed display, and further, when the lower pattern display Z3 is stopped and displayed from the low speed display, double reach Is displayed, the display control device 114 causes the sound lamp control device 113 to display the contents of the third symbol display device 81 first together with the type of reach symbol that has achieved positive change reach. A reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted, and then immediately, a reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted together with the type of reach symbol for which the normal reach is established.

  At this time, in the voice lamp control device 114, when receiving a reach display command notifying that the reach is established along with the type of reach symbol that has established the positive change reach, first, the reach symbol (main design) that establishes the positive change reach Output the probability change reach sound corresponding to. As shown in FIG. 9 (b), in the case of the probability variation reach voice, as soon as the playback is started, the sound section is played back. Further, when the probability change reach voice is output, the value of the reach voice reproduction counter 223c becomes 1.

  Next, in the voice lamp control device 114, when the reach display command for notifying reach establishment is received together with the type of reach symbol that normally establishes reach, this time, the reach symbol (main symbol) that establishes the normal reach Output the normal reach voice corresponding to. At this time, as shown in FIG. 9 (b), the normal reach sound is reproduced for the first 20 milliseconds when the reproduction is started. Further, when the normal reach voice is output, the value of the reach voice reproducing counter 223c becomes 2.

  When the value of the reach voice reproduction counter 223c becomes 2, the voice lamp control device 114 stops the reproduction of the reach voice reproduced most recently, that is, the normal reach voice whose reproduction is started later. As a result, when double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, two of the probability change reach sound and the normal reach sound are once reproduced, but the normal reach sound is immediately stopped from being reproduced. , The odd change reach voice will be played to the end. And since the first 20 milliseconds of the reach voice is a silent section, the normal reach voice is stopped during the playback of the normal reach even if the normal reach playback is started once. .

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the double reach occurs in the third symbol display device, the voice lamp control device sends a command to notify “probability change reach establishment” as the display content of the third symbol display device, “normally” When a command notifying “reach establishment” is received from the display control device, the probability change reach voice and the normal reach voice are superimposed and output from the voice output device. However, as described above, in the case of different voices according to the character pattern corresponding to the main symbol that has become the reach symbol, if these voices are superimposed and output, with the probability change reach voice and the normal reach voice, There is a problem that it becomes difficult to hear each reach voice.

  In addition, it is possible to make it easy to hear each reach voice by completely overlapping and outputting the words emitted in each voice with the probability change reach voice and the normal reach voice, but for that purpose, with each reach voice The timing of the words to be emitted must be matched, and each reach voice becomes uniform only by the difference in voice, and it is lacking in interest. Furthermore, in the first place, it is necessary to reproduce the output of each reach voice in exact synchronization while reproducing the words spoken in each voice completely in time, and the control becomes complicated. The problem of that also arises.

  On the other hand, it is also conceivable to prepare voice data for double reach, but it is necessary to prepare the voice data for each combination of two sets of main symbols (normal symbol and definite change symbol) that established double reach, The storage capacity of the ROM 222 may be increased.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, the reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) indicated by the reach display command received first of all While outputting, when the value of the reach voice playing counter 223c becomes "2" and the number of reach voices being played becomes two, the reach voice played most recently, ie, the normal reach that starts playing later Stop playing the audio. As a result, when double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, two of the probability change reach sound and the normal reach sound are once reproduced, but the normal reach sound is immediately stopped from being reproduced. , The odd change reach voice will be played to the end. And since the first 20 milliseconds of the reach voice is a silent section, the normal reach voice is stopped during the playback of the normal reach even if the normal reach playback is started once. . Therefore, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probability change reach voice can be presented to the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when double reach is established, the display control device 114 first transmits a reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach symbol that has established the probability change reach, and thereafter, The reach display command for notifying reach establishment is sent together with the type of reach symbol that normally establishes the reach, and the voice lamp control device 113 firstly follows the received reach display command. Start playing two reach sounds in order. When the audio lamp control device 113 determines that two reach voices are being reproduced, it stops the reproduction of the reach voice (the reach voice whose reproduction has been started later) which has most recently started to be reproduced. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 does not determine whether the reach display command received from the display control device 114 is the probability change reach or the normal reach, and as a result, the double reach is the third symbol display device 81. When it is displayed on the screen, the player can hear only the probability change reach sound. That is, when double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while suppressing an increase in processing load, only the probability change reach voice can be presented to the player.

  Note that the reach voice playing counter 223c stops playing the reach voice (the normal reach voice that starts playing later) that has been played most recently, when the value of the reach voice playing counter 223c becomes "2". It is initialized to "0" in accordance with Since the reproduction of the probability change reach sound is continued, the value of the reach sound reproduction counter 223c should normally be set to "1". However, the reach voice reproducing counter 223c is used to stop the reproduction of the normal reach voice to be reproduced later when double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the play thereof is performed. After stop control is performed, double reach is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at least while the positive reach sound is being reproduced. Therefore, if the reach voice playing counter 223c is initialized to "0" at the same time as stopping the playback of the reach voice (the normal reach voice whose playback has been started later) played most recently, the reach voice is being played back. In order to initialize the counter 223 c to “0”, it is not necessary to determine the stop of reproduction of the probability change reach sound, so the processing can be simplified.

  In addition, the reach voice reproducing counter 2232c is initialized to “0” also when another display command other than the reach display command is received from the display control device 114 by the voice lamp control device 113. If another display command is received while the reach voice is being reproduced, the reach voice reproduction is continued, so the reach voice reproducing counter 223c should normally be set to "1". However, the reach sound reproducing counter 223c is used to stop the reproduction of the normal reach sound to be reproduced later when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, two reach display commands are continuously transmitted from the display control device 81, and the reach sound is reproduced. If another display command is received during the process, it can be determined that the double reach is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the double reach is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at least while the reach voice is being reproduced. Therefore, when the display other than the reach display command is received from the display control device 114 by the voice lamp control device 113, the reach voice reproduction counter 223c is initialized to “0” to achieve reach voice reproduction. The process can be simplified because it is not necessary to determine stop of the reach voice reproduction in order to initialize the middle counter 223c to "0".

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The processes of the MPU 231 are roughly classified into a main process that is repeatedly executed after power on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and the V interrupt signal detected by the MPU 231. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when it occurs. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted by the image controller 237 to the MPU 231. The image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for completing the image drawing process for one frame. Do.

  The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  In this main process, an initial setting process is executed (S2401). Specifically, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  After the processing of S2401, interrupt permission is set (S2402), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the processing of S2402, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32A, the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 32A is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2501), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 32 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list (see FIG. 13) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  In the V interrupt process, first, a command determination process (S2602) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2603) is executed. In the command determination process (S2602), the content of the command stored in the command buffer area is analyzed, and a process according to the command is executed. For example, when the display variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type indicated by the display variation pattern command is read out from the display data table storage area 232a. , And set in the display data table buffer 233a.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are stored in the command buffer area in 20 milliseconds. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, it quickly grasps the aspect of the fluctuation effects and the continuous advance presentation effects selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image so that the third symbol display device 81 displays.

  In the display setting process (S2603), in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the command determination process (S1402) or the like, the third symbol display device based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233b. At 81, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specifically identified. Further, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a, when the display content (see FIG. 12) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from now is specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233b, A display command for notifying the display content to the audio lamp control device 113 is generated, and processing for transmitting the generated display command to the audio lamp control device 113 is performed.

  In the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a, when a plurality of display contents are defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233b, the display contents are sequentially arranged from the display contents defined earlier. The display command is generated, and the display command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, when double reach is established in the third symbol display device 81, in the display data table, the probability change reach is first established as the display content at the address of the timing when the formation of the double reach is displayed "Probability change reach establishment" is specified together with the type of the main symbol, and then "normal reach establishment" is specified along with the type of the main symbol that establishes the normal reach. Therefore, when the double reach is established, the display control device 114 first transmits a reach display command notifying that the reach is established along with the type of reach symbol that has established the probability change reach, and then, immediately, the normal reach It is comprised so that the reach display command which notifies reach formation may be transmitted with the kind of reach pattern made to be established.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command or the like from the main control device 110 by the command determination process and the display setting process In accordance with the pattern command, etc., the program to be executed by the MPU 231 should not be changed but the display data table should be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. The effect image can be changed.

  When a program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, it is complicated and complicated with the diversification of effect images Since a large load is applied to the processing of the activation and execution of the huge program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  After the display setting process (S2603) is executed, task processing is then executed (S2604). In this task processing, based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third display device 281 specified by the display setting processing (S2603), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is selected. In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S1406). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S1404), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S1405) The drawing list shown in FIG. 13 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34, a pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 first performs the probability change reach as the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Send reach display command to notify reach establishment together with the type of reach symbol established, then immediately send reach display command notifying the reach establishment together with the type of reach symbol that established normal reach . On the other hand, when receiving the reach display command, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol indicated by the reach display command for the time being. Then, when it is determined that there are two reach voices being reproduced, the reproduction of the reach voice (the normal reach voice whose reproduction has been started later) which has started reproduction most recently is stopped.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, even when double reach or single reach, when the probability change reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 transmits a reach display command notifying the reach establishment to the voice lamp control device 113 along with the type of reach symbol that has established the probability change reach, and when 10 milliseconds elapses, the normal reach voice reproduction stop command becomes a voice lamp It transmits to the control device 113. In addition, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the reach establishment along with the type of reach symbol that has established the probability change reach. As to the point of transmitting the reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol for which normal reach has been established immediately after transmitting the reach display command, this embodiment is the same as the first embodiment. However, in the second embodiment, the display control device 114 transmits to the voice lamp control device 114 a reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach symbol for which normal reach is established, and then the probability change A normal reach voice playback stop command is sent to the voice lamp control device 114 when 10 milliseconds have elapsed since the reach display command for notifying reach establishment is sent along with the type of reach symbol that has established the reach. Is different from the first embodiment in that

  Then, in the second embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the normal reach voice reproduction command from the display control device 114, if there is one reach voice being played at that time, the probability variation transmitted before that is received. Since only the probability change reach voice is voice-outputted based on the reach display command notifying the reach establishment together with the type of reach symbol that has established the reach, the output of the probability change reach voice is continued. On the other hand, when the reach voice being reproduced is two when receiving the normal reach voice reproduction command from the display control device 114, the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the positive change reach is established. Based on the reach display command to notify reach establishment together with the type of reach symbol and the reach display command notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach symbol that established normal reach, the probability change reach voice and the normal reach voice Since the voice lamp controller 113 reproduces the sound, the sound lamp control device 113 continues the output of the probability change reach sound while stopping the output of the normal reach sound.

  In the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, a part of the processing of the sound reproduction setting processing (S1916) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 establish a probability change reach. After sending a reach display command notifying reach establishment to the voice lamp control device 113 together with the type of reach symbol that has been sent, the normal reach voice reproduction stop command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 when 10 milliseconds elapse. And the same as the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 33 illustrates the sound reproduction setting process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment. In this sound reproduction setting process, the process of S2311 is executed instead of the process of S2301 (see FIG. 29) of the first embodiment.

  In the process of S2311, the first display command received from the display control device 114 among the unprocessed commands is read out and analyzed from the display control command storage area provided in the RAM 223, and the normal reach voice reproduction stop command is received. It is determined whether or not (S2311). Then, if the normal reach voice reproduction stop command has not been received, the processing of S2302 to S2304 and S2307 to S2309 the same as in the first embodiment is executed. On the other hand, if the normal reach voice reproduction stop command has been received as a result of the process of S2311 (S2311: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the reach voice reproduction counter 223c is 2 or not (S2312).

  As a result, if the value of the reach voice playing counter 223c is not 2 (S2312: No), the voice playing setting process is ended as it is. In the state where the normal reach voice reproduction stop command is received (S2311: Yes), when the value of the reach voice reproduction counter 223c is not 2 (S2312: No), the probability change reach as a single reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Normally, 10 milliseconds elapse after the reach display command for notifying reach establishment is sent from the display control unit 114 to the voice lamp control unit 113 along with the type of reach symbol that has established the probability change reach. This is a case where the reach voice reproduction stop command is received. Therefore, in this case, only the probability variation reach voice is reproduced, and the termination of the voice reproduction setting processing as it is, the continuation of the probability variation reach voice can be continued.

  On the other hand, if the value of the reach voice reproducing counter 223c is 2 as a result of the processing of S2312 (S2312: Yes), the processing of S2305 and S2306 identical to the first embodiment is executed. That is, in the process of S2305, the reproduction of the reach sound reproduced last, that is, the reach sound last started reproduction is stopped (S2305).

  In the state where the normal reach voice reproduction stop command is received (S2311: Yes), when the value of the reach voice reproduction counter 223c is 2 (S2312: Yes), the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Based on the reach display command to notify reach establishment together with the type of reach symbol that has established positive change reach and the reach display command to notify reach establishment along with the type of reach symbol that establishes normal reach The normal reach voice reproduction stop command is received when the odd change reach voice and the normal reach voice are being reproduced. Therefore, in this case, the reproduction of the normal reach sound can be stopped by stopping the reproduction of the reach sound which has most recently started to be reproduced by the process of S2305.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 34, an operation and an effect by executing the audio reproduction setting process will be described. FIG. 34 (a) is an explanatory view for explaining the reproduction of reach voice when double reach is displayed in the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 34 (b) is in the third symbol display device 81. It is an explanatory view for explaining reproduction of reach voice when a single reach of a definite change reach is displayed.

  First, referring to FIG. 34 (a), after the high-speed fluctuation of the fluctuation effect is displayed in the third symbol display device 81, the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped from the low speed display, and further, the lower figure symbol row Z3 is low speed When the display is stopped and displayed, when the double reach is established and displayed, the display control device 114 causes the sound lamp control device 113 to first display the probability change reach as the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Send a reach display command to notify reach establishment together with the type of reach symbol that established, and then immediately send a reach display command notification of reach establishment along with the type of reach symbol that established normal reach Do.

  At this time, in the voice lamp control device 114, when receiving a reach display command notifying that the reach is established along with the type of reach symbol that has established the positive change reach, first, the reach symbol (main design) that establishes the positive change reach Output the probability change reach sound corresponding to. As shown in FIG. 9 (b), in the case of the probability variation reach voice, as soon as the playback is started, the sound section is played back. Further, when the probability change reach voice is output, the value of the reach voice reproduction counter 223c becomes 1.

  Next, in the voice lamp control device 114, when the reach display command for notifying reach establishment is received together with the type of reach symbol that normally establishes reach, this time, the reach symbol (main symbol) that establishes the normal reach Output the normal reach voice corresponding to. At this time, as shown in FIG. 9 (b), the normal reach sound is reproduced for the first 20 milliseconds when the reproduction is started. Further, when the normal reach voice is output, the value of the reach voice reproducing counter 223c becomes 2.

  When the display control device 114 transmits a reach display command notifying that the reach has been established along with the type of reach symbol that has established the probability change reach, a normal reach voice reproduction stop command is sent to the voice lamp control device 10 milliseconds after the transmission. Send to 113. When the normal reach sound reproduction stop command is received, if the value of the reach sound reproduction counter 223c is 2, the sound lamp control device 113 starts the reach sound reproduced most recently, that is, the reproduction later. Stop playing the normal reach sound. Thereby, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, two of the probability change reach sound and the normal reach sound are reproduced once, but the normal reach sound is reproduced the probability change reach sound The playback is stopped when about 10 milliseconds have passed since, and only the probability change reach voice is played to the end. And since the first 20 milliseconds of the reach voice is a silent section, the normal reach voice is stopped during the playback of the normal reach even if the normal reach playback is started once. .

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the double reach occurs in the third symbol display device, the voice lamp control device sends a command to notify “probability change reach establishment” as the display content of the third symbol display device, “normally” When a command notifying “reach establishment” is received from the display control device, the probability change reach voice and the normal reach voice are superimposed and output from the voice output device. However, as described above, in the case of different voices according to the character pattern corresponding to the main symbol that has become the reach symbol, if these voices are superimposed and output, with the probability change reach voice and the normal reach voice, There is a problem that it becomes difficult to hear each reach voice.

  In addition, it is possible to make it easy to hear each reach voice by completely overlapping and outputting the words emitted in each voice with the probability change reach voice and the normal reach voice, but for that purpose, with each reach voice The timing of the words to be emitted must be matched, and each reach voice becomes uniform only by the difference in voice, and it is lacking in interest. Furthermore, in the first place, it is necessary to reproduce the output of each reach voice in exact synchronization while reproducing the words spoken in each voice completely in time, and the control becomes complicated. The problem of that also arises.

  On the other hand, it is also conceivable to prepare voice data for double reach, but it is necessary to prepare the voice data for each combination of two sets of main symbols (normal symbol and definite change symbol) that established double reach, The storage capacity of the ROM 222 may be increased.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, the reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) indicated by the reach display command received first of all On the other hand, when the normal reach sound reproduction stop command is received from the display control device 114, the reproduction of the reach sound reproduced last, that is, the normal reach sound whose reproduction is started later is stopped. Thereby, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, two of the probability change reach sound and the normal reach sound are once reproduced, but the normal reach sound starts the reproduction of the probability change reach sound About 10 milliseconds after that, the playback is stopped, and only the probability change reach sound will be played to the end. And since the first 20 milliseconds of the reach voice is a silent section, the normal reach voice is stopped during the playback of the normal reach even if the normal reach playback is started once. . Therefore, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probability change reach voice can be presented to the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when double reach is established, the display control device 114 first transmits a reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach symbol that has established the probability change reach, and thereafter, The reach display command for notifying reach establishment is sent together with the type of reach symbol that normally establishes the reach, and the voice lamp control device 113 firstly follows the received reach display command. Start playing two reach sounds in order. Then, after receiving two reach voices, the audio lamp control device 113 receives the normal reach voice playback stop command, and then plays back the reach voice (the reach voice whose playback has been started later) that has started playback most recently. Stop. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 does not determine whether the reach display command received from the display control device 114 is the probability change reach or the normal reach, and as a result, the double reach is the third symbol display device 81. When it is displayed on the screen, the player can hear only the probability change reach sound. That is, when double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while suppressing an increase in processing load, only the probability change reach voice can be presented to the player.

  Next, referring to FIG. 34 (b), after the high-speed fluctuation of the fluctuation effect is displayed in the third symbol display device 81, the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped from the low speed display, and the lower figure symbol row Z3 is further displayed. When the stop display is performed from the low speed display, and the positive change reach is established and displayed as the single reach, the display control device 114 causes the audio lamp control device 113 to display the display content of the third symbol display device 81, Along with the type of reach symbol that has established a definite change reach, send a reach display command to notify reach establishment.

  At this time, the voice lamp control device 114 responds to the reach symbol (main symbol) that establishes the probability change reach when receiving the reach display command notifying the reach establishment together with the type of reach symbol that establishes the probability change reach. Output a positive change reach voice. As shown in FIG. 9 (b), in the case of the probability variation reach voice, as soon as the playback is started, the sound section is played back. Further, when the probability change reach voice is output, the value of the reach voice reproduction counter 223c becomes 1.

  When the display control device 114 transmits a reach display command notifying that the reach has been established along with the type of reach symbol that has established the probability change reach, a normal reach voice reproduction stop command is sent to the voice lamp control device 10 milliseconds after the transmission. Send to 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the normal reach voice reproduction stop command, if the value of the reach voice reproduction counter 223c is 1, the voice reproduction setting process ends the process as it is. As a result, the output of the probability change reach voice can be continued.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment can exhibit the same function and effect as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the audio lamp control device 113 acquires the double reach according to the reach display command from the display control device 114 for the time being. After outputting the probability change reach voice to be configured, the normal reach voice is output, and thereafter, when it is determined that two reach voices are being played back, the reach voice that has started playback most recently (normally playback started later) Reach voice playback stopped. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, when it is determined that there are two reach voices being played back, the reach voice that has started playback most recently, that is, the normal reach voice that starts playback later. Overwrite all voice data over silence data.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment except for a part of the processing of the audio reproduction setting process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 35 illustrates the sound reproduction setting process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment. In this sound reproduction setting process, the process of S2321 is executed instead of the process of S2305 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 29).

  That is, when it is determined that the value of the reach voice reproducing counter 223c is 2 as a result of the process of S2301 (S2301: Yes), two reach voices are being reproduced, so the last, ie, the last Silence data is overwritten on the audio data set in any of the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to d4 of the reproduction audio data storage area 223d (S2321). Then, after the process of S2321, the process of S2306 which is the same as that of the first embodiment is executed, and the audio reproduction setting process is ended.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 36, an operation and an effect by executing the sound reproduction setting process will be described. FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the reproduction of reach voice when double reach is displayed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the third symbol display device 81, after the high-speed fluctuation of the fluctuation effect is displayed, the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped from the low speed display, and further, when the lower pattern display Z3 is stopped and displayed from the low speed display, double reach Is displayed, the display control device 114 causes the sound lamp control device 113 to display the contents of the third symbol display device 81 first together with the type of reach symbol that has achieved positive change reach. A reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted, and then immediately, a reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted together with the type of reach symbol for which the normal reach is established.

  At this time, in the voice lamp control device 114, when receiving a reach display command notifying that the reach is established along with the type of reach symbol that has established the positive change reach, first, the reach symbol (main design) that establishes the positive change reach Output the probability change reach sound corresponding to. As shown in FIG. 9 (b), in the case of the probability variation reach voice, as soon as the playback is started, the sound section is played back. Further, when the probability change reach voice is output, the value of the reach voice reproduction counter 223c becomes 1.

  Next, in the voice lamp control device 114, when the reach display command for notifying reach establishment is received together with the type of reach symbol that normally establishes reach, this time, the reach symbol (main symbol) that establishes the normal reach Output the normal reach voice corresponding to. At this time, as shown in FIG. 9 (b), the normal reach sound is reproduced for the first 20 milliseconds when the reproduction is started. Further, when the normal reach voice is output, the value of the reach voice reproducing counter 223c becomes 2.

  When the value of the reach voice reproducing counter 223c becomes 2, the voice lamp control device 114 reproduces the reach voice reproduced most recently, that is, the reproduction voice data storage area in which the voice data of the normal reach voice whose reproduction is started later is set. Silence data is overwritten on any of the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to d4 of 223d. As a result, silence continues to be output as a normal reach sound whose reproduction has been started later.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the double reach occurs in the third symbol display device, the voice lamp control device sends a command to notify “probability change reach establishment” as the display content of the third symbol display device, “normally” When a command notifying “reach establishment” is received from the display control device, the probability change reach voice and the normal reach voice are superimposed and output from the voice output device. However, as described above, in the case of different voices according to the character pattern corresponding to the main symbol that has become the reach symbol, if these voices are superimposed and output, with the probability change reach voice and the normal reach voice, There is a problem that it becomes difficult to hear each reach voice.

  In addition, it is possible to make it easy to hear each reach voice by completely overlapping and outputting the words emitted in each voice with the probability change reach voice and the normal reach voice, but for that purpose, with each reach voice The timing of the words to be emitted must be matched, and each reach voice becomes uniform only by the difference in voice, and it is lacking in interest. Furthermore, in the first place, it is necessary to reproduce the output of each reach voice in exact synchronization while reproducing the words spoken in each voice completely in time, and the control becomes complicated. The problem of that also arises.

  On the other hand, it is also conceivable to prepare voice data for double reach, but it is necessary to prepare the voice data for each combination of two sets of main symbols (normal symbol and definite change symbol) that established double reach, The storage capacity of the ROM 222 may be increased.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, the reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) indicated by the reach display command received first of all While outputting, when the value of the reach voice playing counter 223c becomes "2" and the number of reach voices being played becomes two, the reach voice played most recently, ie, the normal reach that starts playing later Silence will continue to be played as voice. Thereby, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, two of the probability change reach sound and the normal reach sound are reproduced, but since the normal reach sound is reproduced as silence, only the probability change reach sound is Will be heard by the player. Therefore, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probability change reach voice can be presented to the player.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment can exhibit the same function and effect as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first and third embodiments, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, it outputs the reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol indicated by the reach display command for the time being. did. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a reach display command from the display control device 114, a predetermined time (for example, 20 milliseconds) after receiving the reach display command. Even if the display command from the display control device 114 is received, the display command is ignored until the time e.

  In the fourth embodiment, the normal reach voice does not require the silent period of 20 milliseconds as in the first to third embodiments, and the reproduction of the normal reach voice is started similarly to the probability change reach voice. Then, an audible section such as "It's reach!" Will be played immediately. Further, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment is the configuration of a part of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 and the processing of a part of the audio reproduction setting process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221. This is the same as the first and third embodiments. For example, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 first displays the display content of the third symbol display device 81 together with the type of reach symbol that has established the positive change reach. A reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted, and then immediately, a reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted together with the type of reach symbol for which the normal reach is established. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 37 is a schematic view schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment has a reach voice reproduction start time counter 2231 instead of the reach voice reproduction counter 223c of the RAM 223 in the first and third embodiments.

  The reach voice reproduction start time counter 2231 is a counter that counts an elapsed time after the start of the reach voice reproduction. In the initial value setting process (see S1810 in FIG. 22) of the RAM 223 which is executed when the power is turned on, the reach voice reproduction start time counter 2231 is set to 0 as an initial value. When the value of the reach voice reproduction start time counter 2231 is 0, the value of 0 is maintained.

  When the reproduction of the reach voice is started, the MPU 223 sets 1 in the time counter 223l after the start of the reach voice reproduction. When the value of the reach voice reproduction start time counter 2231 becomes a number other than 0, the update process is performed to add 1 in the counter update process (S1912 in FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 221 every one millisecond. To be done. Then, when the value of the reach voice reproduction start time counter 2231 becomes 20, the time counter 2231 is again set to 0, and thereafter the value is maintained at 0. Thus, it is possible to count 20 milliseconds after the start of the reach voice reproduction by the time counter 223l after the start of the reach voice reproduction.

  The reach voice reproduction start time counter 2231 is referred to in the sound reproduction setting process (S1916), and the display control device 114 displays a display command while the reach voice reproduction start time counter 2231 indicates a value other than 0. If received, the display command is ignored.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an audio reproduction setting process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment.

  In the sound reproduction setting process in the fourth embodiment, first, it is judged whether or not the time counter 2231 after reaching the reach sound reproduction start is 0 (S2331). As a result, if the reach voice reproduction start time counter 2231 is 0 (S2331: Yes), the first display of the unprocessed commands received from the display control device 114 from the display control command storage area provided in the RAM 223 The command is read and analyzed, and it is determined whether a normal reach voice reproduction stop command has been received (S2302).

  As a result, if the reach display command is received (S2302: Yes), the reach voice data corresponding to the reach symbol shown by the reach display command is displayed in the 0th design normal reach voice data 222a0, 0 of the voice data storage area 222a. The first symbol probability change reach voice data 222a1, the second symbol normal reach voice data 222a2, ... read out from the ninth probability change reach voice data 222a9, and the area 223d1 for the first to fourth channels of the reproduction voice data storage area 223d A free channel area of ̃223 d4 is set, and reach voice reproduction is started (S2303).

  Then, 1 is set in the time counter 223l after the start of reach voice reproduction (S2332). Then, the voice reproduction setting process is ended. By the process of S2332, the reach voice reproduction start time counter 2231 is incremented by 1 until the value becomes “20” in the counter update process (S1912 in FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 221 every 1 millisecond, and the value is When it becomes "20", update processing is performed to initialize to "0". That is, the reach voice reproduction start time counter 2231 counts 20 milliseconds after the start of the reach sound reproduction.

  If the reach display command has not been received as a result of the process of S2302 (S2302: No), it is then determined whether another display command has been received (S2307). As a result, when another display command is received (S2307: Yes), voice data corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 indicated by the received display command is output from the voice data storage area 222 It is read out and set as the free channel area of the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to 223d4 of the reproduction audio data storage area 223d, and the reproduction of the audio is started (S2308). Then, the voice reproduction setting process is ended. Further, as a result of the processing of S2307, if another display command is not received (S2307: No), the voice reproduction setting processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the time counter after start of reach voice reproduction is not 0 as a result of the process of S2331 (S2331: No), it is determined whether a display command has been received (S2333). As a result, if the display command has not been received (S2333: No), the voice reproduction setting process is ended as it is. If the display command has been received (S2333: Yes), the received display command is deleted (S2334), and the voice reproduction setting process is ended.

  The reach voice reproduction start time counter 223l takes a non-zero value for 20 milliseconds after the start of reach sound reproduction. Therefore, the display command received from the display control device 114 is ignored for 20 milliseconds after the start of the reach voice reproduction.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 39, an operation and an effect by executing the sound reproduction setting process will be described. FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for describing reproduction of reach voice when double reach is displayed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the third symbol display device 81, after the high-speed fluctuation of the fluctuation effect is displayed, the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped from the low speed display, and further, when the lower pattern display Z3 is stopped and displayed from the low speed display, double reach Is displayed, the display control device 114 causes the sound lamp control device 113 to display the contents of the third symbol display device 81 first together with the type of reach symbol that has achieved positive change reach. A reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted, and then immediately, a reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted together with the type of reach symbol for which the normal reach is established.

  At this time, in the voice lamp control device 114, when receiving a reach display command notifying that the reach is established along with the type of reach symbol that has established the positive change reach, first, the reach symbol (main design) that establishes the positive change reach Output the probability change reach sound corresponding to. As shown in FIG. 9 (b), in the case of the probability variation reach voice, as soon as the playback is started, the sound section is played back. In addition, when the probability change reach voice is output, the value of the time counter 223l after the start of reach voice reproduction becomes 1. Then, after the start of reach voice reproduction, the time counter 2231 counts 20 milliseconds and takes a value other than 0 during that time.

  Next, the voice lamp control device 114 receives a reach display command notifying that the reach has been established along with the type of reach symbol that has normally reached the reach, but this reach display command is a reach symbol of which the positive change reach is established This is a command that is received immediately after 20 ms has passed after receiving the reach display command that notifies reach establishment along with the type. That is, when the reach display command for notifying reach establishment is received along with the type of reach symbol that normally establishes reach, the reach voice reproduction start time counter 223l takes a value other than 0, so this reach display The command is ignored. Therefore, the reach voice is not output normally.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the double reach occurs in the third symbol display device, the voice lamp control device sends a command to notify “probability change reach establishment” as the display content of the third symbol display device, “normally” When a command notifying “reach establishment” is received from the display control device, the probability change reach voice and the normal reach voice are superimposed and output from the voice output device. However, as described above, in the case of different voices according to the character pattern corresponding to the main symbol that has become the reach symbol, if these voices are superimposed and output, with the probability change reach voice and the normal reach voice, There is a problem that it becomes difficult to hear each reach voice.

  In addition, it is possible to make it easy to hear each reach voice by completely overlapping and outputting the words emitted in each voice with the probability change reach voice and the normal reach voice, but for that purpose, with each reach voice The timing of the words to be emitted must be matched, and each reach voice becomes uniform only by the difference in voice, and it is lacking in interest. Furthermore, in the first place, it is necessary to reproduce the output of each reach voice in exact synchronization while reproducing the words spoken in each voice completely in time, and the control becomes complicated. The problem of that also arises.

  On the other hand, it is also conceivable to prepare voice data for double reach, but it is necessary to prepare the voice data for each combination of two sets of main symbols (normal symbol and definite change symbol) that established double reach, The storage capacity of the ROM 222 may be increased.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, the reach display command received first of all While the reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) indicated by is output, the value of the time counter 223l after the start of reach voice reproduction becomes other than 0, and the reach display command to be received next is ignored. That is, the reach voice is not normally output by the reach display command received later. Therefore, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probability change reach voice can be presented to the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when double reach is established, the display control device 114 first transmits a reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach symbol that has established the probability change reach, and thereafter, The reach display command for notifying reach establishment is sent together with the type of reach symbol that normally establishes the reach, and the voice lamp control device 113 follows the reach display command received earlier. Only the reach voice (as a result, the probability change reach voice) corresponding to the reach symbol indicated by the reach display command is output. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 does not determine whether the reach display command received from the display control device 114 is the probability change reach or the normal reach, and as a result, the double reach is the third symbol display device 81. When it is displayed on the screen, the player can hear only the probability change reach sound. That is, when double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while suppressing an increase in processing load, only the probability change reach voice can be presented to the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the double reach is established, the normal reach voice is not reproduced at all, so the normal reach voice does not require the 20-msec silent interval as in the first to third embodiments, Similar to the odd change reach sound, when the normal reach sound is started to be reproduced, it is possible to immediately reproduce the sound section such as "reach!". Therefore, even when the normal reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a single reach, when the normal reach sound is started to be reproduced, it is possible to reproduce an audio such as "reach!" Immediately.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41, a pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to fourth embodiments, first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to d4 are provided in the reproduction sound data storage area 223d of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, and sound data for reproducing reach sound Has been described in the case where one of the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to d4 is set. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the reach sound area 223d5 is provided in the reproduction sound data storage area 2232d instead of the fourth channel area 223d4, and the sound data for reproducing reach sound is the reach The audio area 223d5 is set. In addition, even when a reach display command is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113 while the reach voice set in the reach voice area 2232d5 is being reproduced, the reach display command is ignored.

  In the fifth embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment, the normal reach voice does not require the 20-millisecond silent section as in the first to third embodiments, and the reproduction of the normal reach voice is started. When it is done, an audible section such as "Leach's!" Will be played immediately. Further, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment is the configuration of a part of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 and the processing of a part of the audio reproduction setting process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221. This is the same as the first, third and fourth embodiments. For example, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 first displays the display content of the third symbol display device 81 together with the type of reach symbol that has established the positive change reach. A reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted, and then immediately, a reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted together with the type of reach symbol for which the normal reach is established. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 40 is a schematic view schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment. The reproduced voice data storage area 223d of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment has a reach voice area 223d5 instead of the fourth channel area 223d4. Further, the RAM 223 in the fourth embodiment is an in-use area flag for reach voice, instead of the reach voice reproduction counter 223c in the first and third embodiments and the time counter after start of reach voice reproduction in the fourth embodiment 223l. It has 223 m.

  The reach voice area 223 d 5 is a dedicated area for exclusively storing voice data for reproducing reach voice. When the MPU 221 receives a reach display command from the display control device 114, voice data corresponding to the reach symbol indicated by the reach display command (0th symbol normal reach voice data 222a0, 1st symbol probability variation reach voice data 222a1, 2nd The symbol normal reach voice data 222a2, ..., and the ninth symbol probability change reach voice data 222a9 are read from the voice data storage area 222a, and the read reach voice data is stored in the reach voice area 223d5.

  The MPU 221 decodes audio data stored in the first to third channel areas 223d1 to d3 and the reach audio area 223d5, and generates an audio signal. Then, the audio signal generated for each audio reproduction channel is mixed and then output to the audio output device 226. Thus, four audio data can be simultaneously reproduced and can be output from the audio output device 226.

  Reach voice area in-use flag 223 m is a flag indicating that reach voice data is set (stored) in reach voice area 223 m and reach voice is being played using the set reach voice data. is there. When the reach voice area in-use flag 223m is on, it indicates that reach voice is being reproduced using reach voice data set in the reach voice area 223m. In addition, when the reach voice area in-use flag 223m is off, it indicates that reach voice is not reproduced using reach voice data set in the reach voice area 223m.

  The reach voice area in-use flag 223m is set to off as an initial value in the initial value setting process (see S1810 in FIG. 22) of the RAM 223 executed when the power is turned on. Then, the reach display command is received from the display control device 114 by the voice lamp control device 114, and the reach voice data is set to the reach voice area 223d5, and the reach voice data set to the reach voice area 223d5 is used. When the output of the reach voice is started, the reach voice area in-use flag 223m is set to on. When the reach voice area in-use flag 223m is on, when another reach display command is received from the display control device 114, the reach display command is ignored. Then, when the reproduction of the reach voice using the reach voice data set in the reach voice area 223d5 ends, the reach voice area in-use flag 223m is set to off.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an audio reproduction setting process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment.

  In this voice reproduction setting process, first, it is judged whether or not the reach sound being played so far has finished playing (S2341), and the reach sound has not been played so far, or even if it is being played, If it is determined that the reproduction has not ended (S2341: No), then, from the display control command storage area provided in the RAM 223, the first display command received from the display control device 114 among the unprocessed commands is It is read out and analyzed, and it is judged whether or not the normal reach voice reproduction stop command has been received (S2302).

  As a result, if the reach display command has not been received (S2302: No), it is then determined whether or not another display command has been received (S2307). As a result, when another display command is received (S2307: Yes), voice data corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 indicated by the received display command is output from the voice data storage area 222 It is read out and set as the free channel area of the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to 223d4 of the reproduction audio data storage area 223d, and the reproduction of the audio is started (S2308). Then, the voice reproduction setting process is ended. Further, as a result of the processing of S2307, if another display command is not received (S2307: No), the voice reproduction setting processing is ended as it is.

  If the reach display command is received as a result of the process of S2302 (S2302: Yes), it is then determined whether the reach voice area in-use flag 223m is off (S2342). As a result, if the reach voice area in-use flag 223m is off (S2342: Yes), the reach voice data corresponding to the reach symbol shown by the reach display command is displayed as the 0th design normal reach of the voice data storage area 222a. The voice data 222a0, the first symbol probability change reach voice data 222a1, the second symbol normal reach voice data 222a2, ... read out from the ninth probability change reach voice data 222a9, the reach sound area 223d5 of the reproduction voice data storage area 223d And the play of the reach voice is started (S2343). Then, the reach voice area in-use flag 223m is set to ON (S2344), and the voice reproduction setting process is ended.

  When the reach voice area in-use flag 223m is on as a result of the process of S2342 (S2342: No), the received reach display command is deleted (S2335), and the voice reproduction setting process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined as a result of the processing in S2341 that the reach sound currently being played back has finished playing (S2341: Yes), the reach voice area in-use flag 223 m is set to off (S2346) The reproduction setting process ends.

  Here, when the double reach is displayed in the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 first establishes a probability change reach as the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. A reach display command for notifying reach establishment is sent together with the type of reach symbol that has been made, and then, immediately, a reach display command for notifying reach establishment is sent together with the type of reach symbol for which normal reach is established.

  At this time, in the voice lamp control device 114, when the reach display command for notifying reach establishment is received in combination with the type of reach symbol that establishes the definite change reach, the reach symbol which establishes the positive change reach by the voice reproduction setting process. The voice data for reproducing the probability variation reach voice corresponding to (main design) is set in the reach voice area 223d5, and the reproduction of the probability variation reach voice is started. At this time, the reach voice area 223d5 is in use until the reproduction of the probability change reach voice is finished, and the reach voice area in-use flag 223m is turned on.

  Next, the voice lamp control device 114 receives a reach display command notifying that the reach has been established along with the type of reach symbol that has normally reached the reach, but this reach display command is a reach symbol of which the positive change reach is established This is a command that is received immediately after receiving a reach display command that notifies reach establishment together with the type. That is, when the reach display command for notifying reach establishment is received together with the type of reach symbol that normally establishes reach, the reach voice area 223d5 is in use and the reach voice area in-use flag 223m is It is on. As a result, this reach display command is ignored and the reach voice is not output normally.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the double reach occurs in the third symbol display device, the voice lamp control device sends a command to notify “probability change reach establishment” as the display content of the third symbol display device, “normally” When a command notifying “reach establishment” is received from the display control device, the probability change reach voice and the normal reach voice are superimposed and output from the voice output device. However, as described above, in the case of different voices according to the character pattern corresponding to the main symbol that has become the reach symbol, if these voices are superimposed and output, with the probability change reach voice and the normal reach voice, There is a problem that it becomes difficult to hear each reach voice.

  In addition, it is possible to make it easy to hear each reach voice by completely overlapping and outputting the words emitted in each voice with the probability change reach voice and the normal reach voice, but for that purpose, with each reach voice The timing of the words to be emitted must be matched, and each reach voice becomes uniform only by the difference in voice, and it is lacking in interest. Furthermore, in the first place, it is necessary to reproduce the output of each reach voice in exact synchronization while reproducing the words spoken in each voice completely in time, and the control becomes complicated. The problem of that also arises.

  On the other hand, it is also conceivable to prepare voice data for double reach, but it is necessary to prepare the voice data for each combination of two sets of main symbols (normal symbol and definite change symbol) that established double reach, The storage capacity of the ROM 222 may be increased.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, the reach display command received first of all While the reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) indicated by is output, the reach voice area 223d5 is in use, and the reach display command to be received next is ignored. That is, the reach voice is not normally output by the reach display command received later. Therefore, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probability change reach voice can be presented to the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when double reach is established, the display control device 114 first transmits a reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach symbol that has established the probability change reach, and thereafter, The reach display command for notifying reach establishment is sent together with the type of reach symbol that normally establishes the reach, and the voice lamp control device 113 follows the reach display command received earlier. Only the reach voice (as a result, the probability change reach voice) corresponding to the reach symbol indicated by the reach display command is output. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 does not determine whether the reach display command received from the display control device 114 is the probability change reach or the normal reach, and as a result, the double reach is the third symbol display device 81. When it is displayed on the screen, the player can hear only the probability change reach sound. That is, when double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while suppressing an increase in processing load, only the probability change reach voice can be presented to the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the double reach is established, the normal reach voice is not reproduced at all, so the normal reach voice does not require the 20-msec silent interval as in the first to third embodiments, Similar to the odd change reach sound, when the normal reach sound is started to be reproduced, it is possible to immediately reproduce the sound section such as "reach!". Therefore, even when the normal reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a single reach, when the normal reach sound is started to be reproduced, it is possible to reproduce an audio such as "reach!" Immediately.

  In addition, the "3rd design" as described in the said embodiment respond | corresponds to the "identification information" as described in a claim. The "big hit" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "predetermined gaming value" described in the claims, and the "normal win" described in the above embodiment is the "first game" described in the claims Corresponding to the "value", the "permanent variation jackpot" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "second game value" described in the claims. The “normal reach” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “first effect aspect” described in the claims, and the “probability change reach” described in the above embodiment is the “second The "double reach" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "third effect mode" described in the claims. The “normal reach voice” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “first voice” described in the claims, and the “probable reach voice” described in the above embodiments is “claimed first”. It corresponds to "voice of 2". The "normal medium" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "first state" described in the claims, and the "probable change" and "time in the middle" described in the above embodiments are described in the claims. Corresponds to the "second state".

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  For example, in the first to third embodiments described above, the case where the number of reach voices being played is counted between 0 and 2 in the reach voice playing counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. However, the reach voice reproducing counter 223c may be configured by a 1-bit counter. In this case, the reach voice reproducing counter 223c is set to 0 as an initial value in an initial value setting process (see S1810 in FIG. 22) of the RAM 223 which is executed when the power is turned on. Then, when the reach display command for notifying reach establishment is received from the display control device 114 and reproduction of the reach sound is started, the MPU 221 adds 1 to the value of the reach sound reproducing counter 223c.

  Here, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 first transmits a reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach symbol that has established the probability change reach. Then, immediately after that, a reach display command for notifying reach establishment is sent together with the type of reach symbol that has established normal reach. Therefore, in this case, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a reach display command notifying that the reach is established along with the type of the reach symbol that has established the second normal reach, the value of the reach voice reproduction counter 223c is 0 It becomes.

  The voice lamp control device 113 starts reproduction of reach voice, adds 1 to the reach voice reproduction counter 223c, and then confirms the value of the reach voice reproduction counter 223c, and if the value is 0, 2 It is determined that two reach voices are being played, and the most recently played reach voice, that is, the normal reach voice whose playback has been started later is stopped, or the normal reach voice whose playback is started after that is Silence data is overwritten on the audio data set in the reproduction audio data storage area 223 d for reproduction. Alternatively, when the normal reach voice reproduction stop command is received from the display control device 114, if the value of the reach voice reproduction counter 223c is 0, it is determined that two reach voices are being reproduced, and reproduction is performed most recently. In the voice data set in the playback voice data storage area 223 d to play back the reached reach voice, that is, to stop the playback of the normal reach voice whose playback has been started later, or to play the normal reach voice that has started playback thereafter On the other hand, overwrite silence data.

  Also by these, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probability change reach sound can be heard to the player.

  When the reach voice reproducing counter 223c is configured of a 1-bit counter, the reach voice reproducing counter 223c receives other display commands other than the reach display command from the display control device 114 by the voice lamp control device 113. When it is done, it should be initialized to "0".

  In the second embodiment, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a normal reach audio playback stop command from the display control device 114, it is determined that two reach audios are being played back, if the normal reach audio playback stop command is received. Although the case of stopping the playback of the reach voice, that is, the normal reach voice whose playback has been started later has been described, the playback voice data is not for stopping the playback but for playing the normal reach voice whose playback is started later. Silence data may be overwritten on the audio data set in the storage area 223 d. Also in this case, as in the second embodiment, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probability change reach voice can be presented to the player.

  In the first to third embodiments, in the case where the normal reach voice is reproduced in the audio lamp control device 113, the case where the silent period is 20 milliseconds after the start of the reproduction has been described. The length of time does not have to be 20 milliseconds. When double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the time required from the start of the reproduction of the normal reach sound to the stop of the reproduction of the normal reach sound or the reproduction of the normal reach sound If the time required for the audio data set in the reproduced voice data storage area 223d to be overwritten with silent data to reproduce the normal reach voice after the start is equal to or longer than the silent data, the silent interval of the normal reach voice is 20 It may be shorter or longer than milliseconds.

  In the fourth embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, all display commands from the display control device 114 are received for 20 milliseconds after the start of the reach voice reproduction. Although the case of ignoring has been described, the time for ignoring the display command does not necessarily have to be 20 milliseconds. When double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, reproduction of the probability change reach voice is started by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the first reach display command transmitted from the display control device 114. From the above, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a second reach display command (a reach display command for notifying reach establishment in combination with the type of reach symbol that has established normal reach) transmitted from the display control unit 114. If the time is longer than the time taken to determine, the time to ignore the display command may be any length.

  In the fourth embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, all display commands from the display control device 114 are ignored for a predetermined second after the start of the reach voice reproduction. However, it may be configured to ignore only the reach display command for a predetermined period of time after starting playback of the reach voice, or to ignore only some of the commands including the reach display command. It may be configured as follows. Also in this case, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probability change reach voice can be presented to the player.

  In the first to third embodiments, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 first notifies of the reach establishment in combination with the type of reach symbol that has established the positive change reach. Although the case where the reach display command which notifies reach establishment according to the kind of reach symbol which established normal reach was immediately transmitted after transmitting the reach display command to do was explained, two reach display commands are transmitted. Order may be reversed. That is, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 first transmits a reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach symbol that has established normal reach, Thereafter, it may be configured to immediately transmit a reach display command notifying of reach establishment together with the type of reach symbol that has established normal reach. In this case, as a modification of the first embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 normally reproduces the normal reach sound, which has been started to be reproduced first, when it is determined that two reach sounds are being reproduced. It may be made to stop while reach sound reproduces a silent section. Alternatively, as a modification of the second embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 performs the reproduction first if two reach sounds are being reproduced when the normal reach sound reproduction stop command is received from the display control device 114. The playback of the started normal reach voice may be stopped while the normal reach voice is playing a silent section. Alternatively, as a modification of the third embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 can play back the normal reach voice, which has been started earlier, when it is determined that two reach voices are being played back. Silence data may be written over the audio data set in the data storage area 223 d. Also in this case, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probability change reach voice can be presented to the player.

  In each of the above embodiments, the audio lamp control device 113 has four audio reproduction channels and is configured to be capable of reproducing four channels of audio, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the audio lamp control device 113 may have a plurality of audio reproduction channels, and may be configured to be able to reproduce audio of a plurality of channels.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the gaming state is normal, the passage of the ball to the second through gate 670 on the right side of the game board is monitored, and at least three balls are the second through gate in 10 seconds. Although the case where it is determined that the player is hitting the right when passing 670 has been described, the determination condition of the right hitting is an example, and a ball having a predetermined number of balls of 2 or more is second during a predetermined time. When passing through the through gate 670, it may be configured to determine that the player is hitting the right.

  In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, when the gaming state is in a definite or time-saving state, the passage of the ball to the first through gate 67 on the left side of the game board is monitored, and at least three balls are in 10 seconds. The case where it is determined that the player is hitting the left when the first through gate 67 is passed has been described, but the determination condition of the left hitting is an example, and the predetermined number of balls of two or more during the predetermined time is If the ball passes the first through gate 67, it may be configured to determine that the player is hitting left.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the left or right hitting instruction given to the player has been described by displaying the hitting direction indication screen on the third symbol display device 81 shown in FIG. The indication of left-handed or right-handed is not necessarily limited to the case where the display by the third symbol display device 81 is given, and a lamp (for example, a lamp in the form of an arrow) instructing left-handed or right-handed The player may be instructed to hit the left or hit the right by providing the player 10 in a position where it can be viewed in a front view of the machine 10 and turning on or flashing this lamp. In addition, a right-handed or left-handed instruction may be output from the audio output device 226 by voice.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether the player is hitting right or left, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and display control It may be performed by the device 114. In this case, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the first through gate passage command from the main control device 110, the display light control device 114 displays, for the display control device 114, a display first indicating that the ball has passed the first through gate 67. It suffices to send a through gate passage command. In addition, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the second through gate passage command from the main control device 110, the display control device 114 displays a second through display indicating that the sphere has passed through the second through gate 670. It suffices to send a gate passage command.

  Further, the main control device 110 may determine whether the player is hitting the right or hitting the left. The main control device 110 originally grasps the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, and also receives a switch for detecting passage of the ball of the first through gate 67 and passage of the ball of the second through gate 670. Therefore, main controller 110 can easily make the determination. When the main control device 110 determines whether the player is hitting the right or left, it is assumed that the main control device 110 is in the normal game state and the player is hitting the right. If it is determined, the left display instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113, and if it is determined that the player is left striking while the gaming state is normal, the audio lamp control device A right-handed instruction screen display command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 via the control unit 113.

  In each of the above embodiments, if it is determined that the player is hitting the right when the gaming state is normal, the player is instructed to perform a left strike which is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is in a certain change or time saving In the case where it is determined that the player is hitting the left, the player is instructed to give the player a right-handed strike, which is advantageous, but the player is only in the normal gaming state. If it is determined that the player is hitting to the right, the player is instructed to hit the player in an advantageous left, and if the gaming state is in a definite or changing state, the player is not particularly instructed to hit the ball. Good. Conversely, if it is determined that the player is hitting the left only when the gaming state is in a definite change or at a short time, the player is instructed to hit the player in an advantageous right, and the gaming state is in the normal state. In this case, it is not necessary to instruct the player particularly on the hitting direction. In particular, since the player wants to gain more profit when the gaming state is in a certain or changing state, at least the gaming state is in a certain or changing state and the player is hitting the left. When it is determined, the player can enjoy the game in an advantageous state by instructing the player to perform an advantageous right strike.

  In each of the above embodiments, the display control device 114 has described the case of preparing the display data table for each fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Prepare a display data table for each element such as "Change start", "High speed change", "Advance notice effect", "Normal reach", "Super reach", according to the change pattern indicated in the display change pattern command After identifying the elements necessary for the fluctuation production, the display data tables corresponding to the elements required for the fluctuation production identified are combined into one, and the final periodic display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is generated You may do it. For "variation start", "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach", etc., a display common to each fluctuation pattern is often performed. Therefore, the data table can be efficiently provided by elementizing the fluctuation effect in this way and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element.

  In each of the above embodiments, the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every display interval of an image of one frame for ending the drawing process (every 20 milliseconds in each of the above embodiments). However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image of one frame. Since the driving of the third symbol display device 81 is always performed so that an image of one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), a V interrupt signal is generated every display of an image of one frame. By sending, it is possible to keep accurate without having to time its time interval.

  In each of the above embodiments, the image controller 237 specifies a frame buffer to which the drawn image is to be expanded based on the drawing object buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image expanded from the other frame buffer earlier. Although the case where information is read and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the frame in which the image controller 237 should expand the drawn image every time it receives the drawing list The buffers may be alternately selected, and the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and may be transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Also, each time the image controller 237 transmits the image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 and the frame buffer to which the drawn image should be expanded. The frame buffer to be used may be switched.

  Although said each embodiment demonstrated the case where the 3rd symbol which consists of the main symbols which the numbers of "0" to "9" were not attached is made to stop-display demonstration effect, but what is necessarily limited to this Instead, the third symbol consisting of a numbered main symbol or a non-numbered main symbol may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. In addition, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. In addition, a character or a back image that is completely different from the third pattern or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the display data table has described the case where the content (drawing content) of the image to be drawn at that time is defined corresponding to the time in which 20 milliseconds are represented as one unit. The display content is not limited to the above, and any display content may be defined at predetermined time intervals. The predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30 seconds. Since an image of one frame is displayed each time, the display data table may define display contents at intervals of 1/30 seconds.

  Further, in the display data table, as a sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals, an address of the character ROM 234 where image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored instead of instructing the sprite type itself. May be defined. The display control device 114 reads the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. I manage the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. There is no need to manage both the information specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case of displaying a high-speed variation in which all symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player can not visually recognize is displayed. In this case, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced and displayed to an extent that they can not be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which a large number of white points are displayed randomly.

  In the above embodiments, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the special figure 1 holding ball number counter 223a or the special figure 2 holding series counter 223b is decreased by 1 ( Although the case of S2107 to S2109 in FIG. 25 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the variation process (see FIG. 16) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the special view 1 of the main controller 110 subtracted according to the setting of the variation pattern command in the variation start process (S1308). To send the value (NA) of the reserve ball number counter 203d or the special figure 2 reserve ball number counter 203e (see S1310 and S1305 in FIG. 16) from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113, the special view 1 Hold ball number command or special figure 2 hold ball number command is set, and the special figure 1 hold ball number command or special figure 2 hold ball number command is combined with the transmission of the variation pattern command, and the voice lamp control from main controller 110 It may be transmitted to the device 113. Thus, the sound lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the number of holding balls held by the main control device 110. In this case, S2107 to S2109 in FIG. 25 are omitted.

  In the above embodiments, each command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113, and the display control unit 114 is instructed to display from the audio lamp control unit 113. The command may be sent directly from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit 114. Further, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command instructing output of each sound and lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the audio lamp control device. Furthermore, the audio lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By making these into one control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and the cost increase of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

  When the audio lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, a flag is generated instead of the command generated by the audio lamp control device 113 and notified to the display control device 114, and based on the flag A display data table may be set in the display data table buffer 233a, or various image data such as a warning image may be generated. Also, instead of the display command generated by the display control unit 114 and notified to the audio lamp control unit 113, a display flag is generated, and based on the display flag, audio data is read from the audio data storage area 222a You may set to the data storage area 223d.

  In each of the above embodiments, the winning on the first entrance 64, the winning on the second entrance 640, and the passage of the balls to the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 are at maximum, respectively. Although it was configured to be held up to 4 times, the maximum number of holding balls is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times) . In addition, in part of the third symbol display device 81, the number of holding balls of the fluctuation effect based on the winning on the first ball entry 64 and the number of the holding balls of variation based on the winning on the second ball entrance 640, The area divided into four numbers or areas may be displayed in a mode (for example, color or lighting pattern) different by the number of holding balls, and may be a lamp separately from the first symbol display device 37 And the like, and the number of holding balls may be notified by the light emitting member.

  In addition, as shown in each of the above-described embodiments, the fluctuation effect, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbols as identification information are horizontally scrolled on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The symbol may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as the longitudinal direction or L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of symbols, and, for example, one or more characters may be displayed in various ways along with the symbols or in addition to the symbols, or may be displayed in various ways. It also includes the effect display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition making the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

  The main control means which performs main control of the game, the sub control means which performs control based on the control signal from the main control means, and the fluctuation effect accompanied by the dynamic display of the identification information by the control of the sub control means And an audio output means for outputting a voice based on the display contents of the display means, wherein the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode by the fluctuation effect performed by the display means. In a gaming machine in which a predetermined gaming value is given to a player, the gaming machine is predetermined for the player when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a first display mode in a fluctuation effect performed by the display means. A first game value is given as a game value, and when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a second display mode in the change effect performed by the display means, the first game value is given to the player as the predetermined game value Play value of A second game value more advantageous to the player than the game is given, and it is shown that there is a possibility that the display may be stopped and displayed in the first display mode as an effect mode of the fluctuation effect performed by the display means. Third effect showing the effect mode, the second effect mode indicating that there may be a stop display in the second display mode, and the third effect showing the first effect mode and the second effect mode at the same time A first sound output when the variation effect is performed in the first effect mode by the display means as an audio output by the audio output means, including an aspect; The second control method includes the second sound output when the change effect is performed in the second effect mode, and the sub-control means causes the change effect in the third effect mode by the display means. When the second voice output unit Gaming machine A1, characterized in that for outputting audio.

  According to the gaming machine A1, main control of the game is performed by the main control means, and control is performed by the sub control means based on a control signal from the main control means. Under the control of the sub-control means, the change effect accompanied by the dynamic display of the identification information is performed by the display means, and the voice output means outputs the sound based on the display contents on the display means.

  In this gaming machine, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the first display mode in the change effect performed in the display mode, the first gaming value is awarded to the player as the predetermined game value. In addition, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second display mode in the change effect performed in the display mode, the second game advantageous to the player than the first game value as the predetermined game value for the player Value is given. In addition, as the effect mode of the change effect performed by the display means, the first effect mode indicating that there is a possibility that the stop display may be performed in the first display mode, and the stop effect may be displayed in the second display mode A second effect mode indicating that there is a sex and a third effect mode simultaneously indicating the first effect mode and the second effect mode are included. Furthermore, when the fluctuation effect is performed in the first effect mode by the display unit, the first sound is output from the sound output unit, and the fluctuation effect is performed in the second effect mode by the display unit. The second voice is output from the voice output means.

  Here, when the fluctuation effect is performed in the third effect mode by the display means, that is, when the fluctuation effect is performed in the effect mode in which the first effect mode and the second effect mode are simultaneously displayed, By the control means, only the second voice is output from the voice output means, and the first voice is not output. Thereby, when the fluctuation effect is performed in the third effect mode by the display means, the player can listen to the second voice the same as when the fluctuation effect is performed in the second display mode. In the second display mode in which the second game value advantageous to the second game mode is given, it is possible to enhance the expectation that the identification information is stopped and displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine A1, the sub control means includes display control means for controlling the display on the display means, and voice control means for controlling the output of sound on the voice output means, and the display control means is for performing the display The notification means for notifying the sound control means of the display content in the means is provided, and the notification means performs the change presentation in the third effect mode on the display means as the display contents on the display means. The second effect mode and the first effect mode are notified to the sound control means, and the sound control means outputs the sound based on the display contents in the display means notified from the notification means. According to the output control means for selecting an intended voice and starting the output, and from the notification means, as the display content in the display means, the second effect mode and the first effect When the output control means starts outputting the second voice and the first voice as the voice to be output based on the notification of the message, the output of the first voice A game machine A2 comprising: stop means for stopping the game.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the display means is controlled by the display control means provided in the sub control means, and the sound output means is controlled in sound output by the sound control means provided in the sub control means. Further, the display content in the display means is notified to the voice control means by the notification means provided with the display control means. Then, based on the display content in the display means notified by the notification means, the output control means provided in the voice control means selects a sound to be output, and the output is started.

  Here, when the fluctuation effect is performed in the third effect mode in the display means, the second effect mode and the first effect mode are voice controlled by the notification means in the display control means as the display contents in the display means. The means is notified. When the output of the second voice and the first voice is output as the voice to be output by the output control means of the voice control means, the output of the first voice is stopped by the stopping means. Thereby, although the voice control means performs control to select and output the voice to be output based on the display content in the display means notified from the notification means of the display control means, it is used as the voice to be output. When the second sound and the first sound are output, the output of the first sound is stopped, so when the variation effect is performed in the third effect mode by the display unit, the second Only voice can be output. Therefore, since the sense of expectation that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second display mode in which the second game value advantageous to the player is given can be enhanced, the interest of the player can be enhanced. It has the effect of Further, since the output of voice is started first based on the notification of the display content from the notification means of the display control means, it is not necessary to judge the presence or absence of the voice output based on the display content notified from the notification means. Therefore, there is an effect that an increase in processing load can be suppressed. Moreover, there is an effect that voice output based on the display content notified from the notification means can be performed immediately.

  In the gaming machine A2, when the notification means performs the fluctuation effect on the display means in the third effect mode, the sound control means first performs the second effect mode as the display content on the display means. To the voice control means, and the output control means outputs the voice to be output in the order of the display contents in the display means notified from the notification means. A game machine A3 characterized by selecting and starting output.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the variation effect is performed in the third effect mode on the display means, the second effect mode is first notified to the voice control means by the notification means as the display content on the display means, and then the first effect The mode is notified to the voice control means by the notification means. Further, since the sound to be output is selected and output by the output control means in the order of the display contents in the display means notified by the notification means, when the variation effect is performed in the third effect mode on the display means, First, the output of the second voice is started, and then the output of the first voice is started. After that, the output of the first voice is stopped by the stopping means. As a result, since the second sound to be output when the fluctuation effect is performed in the third effect mode can be started earlier than the first sound whose output is stopped. When the fluctuation effect is performed in the third effect mode, there is an effect that the output of the second sound can be started without delay.

  In any one of the game machines A1 to A3, a game machine A4 characterized in that the first sound is a sound of silence during a predetermined time after the start of sound output.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the first sound is for outputting a sound in a silent state for a predetermined time after the output of the sound is started, when the change effect is performed in the third effect mode by the display means, Even when the output of the second voice and the first voice is started as the voice to be output, the voice of the silence state is output from the first voice. Therefore, by stopping the output of the first voice until the predetermined time elapses after the start of the output of the first voice, the player can be prevented even if the first voice is output for a moment. There is an effect that it can control that it becomes noise as it is heard.

  In the gaming machine A1, the sub control means includes display control means for controlling the display on the display means, and voice control means for controlling the output of sound on the voice output means, and the display control means is for performing the display The notification means for notifying the sound control means of the display content in the means is provided, and the notification means performs the change presentation in the third effect mode on the display means as the display contents on the display means. The second effect mode and the first effect mode are notified to the sound control means, and the sound control means outputs the sound based on the display contents in the display means notified from the notification means. According to the output control means for selecting an intended voice and starting the output, and from the notification means, as the display content in the display means, the second effect mode and the first effect When the output control means starts outputting the second voice and the first voice as the voice to be output based on the notification of the message, the first voice is silenced. A gaming machine B1 comprising: rewriting means for rewriting to a state voice and outputting.

  According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the display means is controlled by the display control means provided in the sub control means, and the sound output means is controlled in sound output by the sound control means provided in the sub control means. Further, the display content in the display means is notified to the voice control means by the notification means provided with the display control means. Then, based on the display content in the display means notified by the notification means, the output control means provided in the voice control means selects a sound to be output, and the output is started.

  Here, when the fluctuation effect is performed in the third effect mode in the display means, the second effect mode and the first effect mode are voice controlled by the notification means in the display control means as the display contents in the display means. The means is notified. Then, when the output of the second voice and the first voice is outputted as the voice to be outputted by the output control means of the voice control means, the output of the first voice is the voice of the silence state by the rewriting means. Is rewritten and output. Thereby, although the voice control means performs control to select and output the voice to be output based on the display content in the display means notified from the notification means of the display control means, it is used as the voice to be output. When the second voice and the first voice are output, the output of the first voice is rewritten to the voice of the silent state and the output is performed, so that the variation effect is produced in the third effect mode by the display means. When done, the player can be told that only the second voice has been output. Therefore, since the sense of expectation that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second display mode in which the second game value advantageous to the player is given can be enhanced, the interest of the player can be enhanced. It has the effect of In addition, since the output of the sound is started first based on the notification of the display content from the notification means of the display control means, it is possible to immediately perform the voice output based on the display content notified from the notification means. There is.

  In the gaming machine B1, when the notification means performs the fluctuation effect on the display means in the third effect mode, the sound control means first performs the second effect mode as the display content on the display means. To the voice control means, and the output control means outputs the voice to be output in the order of the display contents in the display means notified from the notification means. A game machine B2 characterized by selecting and starting output.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the variation effect is performed in the third effect mode on the display means, the second effect mode is first notified to the voice control means by the notification means as the display content on the display means, and then the first effect The mode is notified to the voice control means by the notification means. Further, since the sound to be output is selected and output by the output control means in the order of the display contents in the display means notified by the notification means, when the variation effect is performed in the third effect mode on the display means, First, the output of the second voice is started, and then the output of the first voice is started. After that, the first voice is rewritten by silent means to a silent voice and output. As a result, the second sound to be told to the player when the variable effect is performed in the third effect mode is started before the first sound to be rewritten to the sound in the silent state. Since it is possible to perform the variation presentation in the third presentation mode, the output of the second voice can be started without delay.

  In the game machine B1 or B2, a game machine B3 characterized in that the first sound is a sound of a silent state for a predetermined time after the start of the sound output.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the first sound is a sound that is originally silenced for a predetermined period of time after the start of the sound output, when the variation effect is performed in the third effect mode by the display means, Even if the output of the second voice and the first voice is started as the voice to be output, the voice of the silence state is output from the first voice. Therefore, the first voice is changed to a silent voice before the predetermined time elapses after the output of the first voice is started, so that the player hears the first voice as noise. There is an effect that it can control that it ends.

  In the gaming machine A1, the sub control means includes display control means for controlling the display on the display means, and voice control means for controlling the output of sound on the voice output means, and the display control means is for performing the display The notification means for notifying the sound control means of the display content in the means is provided, and the notification means first performs the change presentation on the display means in the third effect mode as the display contents on the display means. The second effect mode is notified to the sound control means, and then the first effect mode is notified to the sound control means, and the sound control means is notified from the notification means. Based on the display contents in the display means, an output control means for selecting an audio to be output and starting the output, and the display means in the display means from the notification means When the second effect mode is notified, the apparatus further comprises non-accepting means for setting the notification of the first effect mode from the notifying means at least in a non-accepting state for a predetermined time after receiving the notification. A game machine C1 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the display means is controlled by the display control means provided in the sub control means, and the sound output means is controlled in sound output by the sound control means provided in the sub control means. Further, the display content in the display means is notified to the voice control means by the notification means provided with the display control means. Then, based on the display content in the display means notified by the notification means, the output control means provided in the voice control means selects a sound to be output, and the output is started.

  Here, when the fluctuation effect is performed in the third effect mode on the display means, the second effect mode is first notified to the voice control means by the notification means as the display content on the display means, and then the first effect The mode is notified to the voice control means by the notification means. On the other hand, when the notification of the second effect mode is received from the notification means as the display content of the display means in the voice control means, the predetermined time after the notification is accepted is at least the first effect mode from the notification means. The notification is not accepted by the not accepted means. Thus, when the variable effect is performed in the third effect mode by the display means, only the second sound can be output by the output control means of the sound control means. Therefore, since the sense of expectation that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second display mode in which the second game value advantageous to the player is given can be enhanced, the interest of the player can be enhanced. It has the effect of Further, in this case, since the first voice is not output at all, there is an effect that an increase in processing load can be suppressed. In addition, since the output of the second voice that will be told to the player when the fluctuation effect is performed in the third effect mode can be immediately started, the fluctuation effect is performed in the third effect mode There is an effect that the output of the second voice can be started without delay.

  In the gaming machine A1, the sub control means includes display control means for controlling the display on the display means, and voice control means for controlling the output of sound on the voice output means, and the display control means is for performing the display The notification means for notifying the sound control means of the display content in the means is provided, and the notification means first performs the change presentation on the display means in the third effect mode as the display contents on the display means. The second effect mode is notified to the sound control means, and then the first effect mode is notified to the sound control means, and the sound control means is notified from the notification means. An output control means for selecting a voice to be output based on the display contents in the display means and starting the output, and the first effect aspect or the second one from the notification means A method for outputting the first voice when the first voice or the second voice is selected as the voice to be output by the output control means based on the notification of the delivery mode Storage means for storing second audio data for outputting the first audio data or the second audio, and the second output control means based on the second audio data stored in the storage means And storage control means for not storing the first voice data in the storage means even when the first presentation mode is notified from the notification means when the voice of the second voice is being output. A gaming machine D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the display means is controlled by the display control means provided in the sub control means, and the sound output means is controlled in sound output by the sound control means provided in the sub control means. Further, the display content in the display means is notified to the voice control means by the notification means provided with the display control means. Then, based on the display content in the display means notified by the notification means, the output control means provided in the voice control means selects a sound to be output, and the output is started.

  Here, when the fluctuation effect is performed in the third effect mode on the display means, the second effect mode is first notified to the voice control means by the notification means as the display content on the display means, and then the first effect The mode is notified to the voice control means by the notification means. Then, the second voice is first selected as the voice to be output by the output control means of the voice control means. Then, the storage means stores second audio data for outputting the second audio. Note that the storage means is a voice that the first voice or the second voice is to be output by the output control means based on the notification of the first effect mode or the second effect mode from the notification means. When selected, first voice data for outputting a first voice or second voice data for outputting a second voice are stored. When the second audio is output by the output control means based on the second audio data stored in the storage means, the storage control means even though the first effect mode is notified from the notification means Causes the first voice data to be unstored in the storage means. Thus, when the variable effect is performed in the third effect mode by the display means, only the second sound can be output by the output control means of the sound control means. Therefore, since the sense of expectation that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second display mode in which the second game value advantageous to the player is given can be enhanced, the interest of the player can be enhanced. It has the effect of Further, in this case, since the first voice is not output at all, there is an effect that an increase in processing load can be suppressed. In addition, since the output of the second voice that will be told to the player when the fluctuation effect is performed in the third effect mode can be immediately started, the fluctuation effect is performed in the third effect mode There is an effect that the output of the second voice can be started without delay.

  A game board, a launching means for launching a ball toward the game board, and a detection means for detecting that the ball fired by the launching means has entered a predetermined starting area provided on the game board The determination means performs the determination based on the detection of the ball entering the teaching area by the detection means, and the variation effect accompanied by the dynamic display of the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means In the display means to be performed and the gaming machine in which the predetermined game value is given to the player when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode by the variable effect performed by the display means, the start area is The first starting area where the ball fired to the left of the game board easily enters and the second starting area where the ball fired to the right of the game board easily enters the ball; The machine is in the first state as a gaming state If it has at least the second state and the gaming state is the first state, the case where the ball enters the first starting area is better than the case where the ball enters the second starting area If the game state is the second state, the game is more effective if the ball enters the second start area than if the ball enters the first start area. When the gaming machine is in the second state, and the gaming state is in the second state. Further, the gaming machine further comprises: a first passing means through which at least a part of the ball flowing down the left of the gaming board passes; The game state is the second state by the first detection means for detecting that a ball having a predetermined number of balls of two or more balls has passed the first passing means during a predetermined time, and the first detection means And the number of balls of a predetermined number of balls of two or more is passed through the first passing means during a predetermined time. If it is detected, the gaming machine characterized by comprising a first informing means for informing to fire toward the ball to the game board on the right side E1.

  According to the gaming machine E1, when the detecting means detects that the ball launched toward the game board by the launching means has entered the predetermined starting area provided on the gaming board, the detection is triggered. The determination is performed by the determination means as Based on the result of the determination by the determination means, the variation effect accompanied by the dynamic display of the identification information is performed by the display means, and when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode by the variation effect, the game The player is given a predetermined game value.

  In this gaming machine, the start area is a first start area where the ball fired to the left of the game board easily enters the ball and a second start area where the ball fired to the right of the game board easily enters the ball It is composed of In addition, this game board has at least a first state and a second state as a game state. If the gaming state is the first state, the case where the ball enters the first start area works more advantageously to the player than the case where the ball enters the second start area, and the gaming state is the first state. In the two state, when the ball enters the second start area, the player works more advantageously than when the ball enters the first start area.

  Here, when the gaming state is in the second state, the first passing means through which at least a part of the balls flowing down the left side of the gaming board pass is a ball having a predetermined number of balls of two or more during a predetermined time. When it is detected by the first detection means that the vehicle has passed, it is notified by the first notification means to shoot the ball toward the right of the game board. As a result, it is advantageous for the player to enter the second start area in which the game state is in the second state and the ball fired to the right of the game board easily enters the second start area. Instead, when there is a possibility that the game ball is being fired toward the left of the game board, it is possible to cause the player to shoot the ball toward the right of the game board. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enjoy the game in an advantageous state.

  In addition, since it is notified that the player is directed to shoot the ball toward the right side of the game board only after a ball having a predetermined number of balls of two or more balls has passed through the first passing means for a predetermined time, Even though the player shoots the ball to the right of the game board, some balls flow down the left of the game board, so that the ball passes the first passing means It is possible to suppress the frequent occurrence of notification to send the player to shoot the ball to the right of the game board. In addition, even if the player shoots a ball toward the left of the game board, the ball is only required to pass the ball having a predetermined number of balls greater than or equal to two for a predetermined time during the first passing means. It is possible to suppress the frequent occurrence of the notification by notifying the player to shoot the game toward the right of the game board. Therefore, the notification of the firing direction of the ball is appropriately performed, and the notification is frequently generated, so that it is possible to suppress that the interest in the game is disturbed.

  A game board, a launching means for launching a ball toward the game board, and a detection means for detecting that the ball fired by the launching means has entered a predetermined starting area provided on the game board The determination means performs the determination based on the detection of the ball entering the teaching area by the detection means, and the variation effect accompanied by the dynamic display of the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means In the display means to be performed and the gaming machine in which the predetermined game value is given to the player when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode by the variable effect performed by the display means, the start area is The first starting area where the ball fired to the left of the game board easily enters and the second starting area where the ball fired to the right of the game board easily enters the ball; The machine is in the first state as a gaming state If it has at least the second state and the gaming state is the first state, the case where the ball enters the first starting area is better than the case where the ball enters the second starting area If the game state is the second state, the game is more effective if the ball enters the second start area than if the ball enters the first start area. When the game machine is in the first state, the second passing means through which at least a portion of the ball flowing down the right of the game board passes, and the game state is in the first state. The game state is the first state by a second detection means for detecting that a ball having a predetermined number of balls of two or more has passed the second passing means during a predetermined time, and the second detection means And the number of balls of a predetermined number of balls of two or more is passed through the second passing means during a predetermined time. If is detected, the gaming machine characterized by comprising a second informing means for informing to fire toward the ball to the left of the game board E2.

  According to the gaming machine E2, when the detecting means detects that the ball launched toward the game board by the launching means has entered the predetermined starting area provided on the gaming board, the detection is triggered. The determination is performed by the determination means as Based on the result of the determination by the determination means, the variation effect accompanied by the dynamic display of the identification information is performed by the display means, and when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode by the variation effect, the game The player is given a predetermined game value.

  In this gaming machine, the start area is a first start area where the ball fired to the left of the game board easily enters the ball and a second start area where the ball fired to the right of the game board easily enters the ball It is composed of In addition, this game board has at least a first state and a second state as a game state. If the gaming state is the first state, the case where the ball enters the first start area works more advantageously to the player than the case where the ball enters the second start area, and the gaming state is the first state. In the two state, when the ball enters the second start area, the player works more advantageously than when the ball enters the first start area.

  Here, when the gaming state is in the first state, the second passing means through which at least a part of the balls flowing down the right side of the game board passes is a ball having a predetermined number of balls of two or more during a predetermined time. When it is detected by the second detection means that the has passed, it is notified by the second notification means to shoot the ball toward the left of the game board. Thus, it is advantageous for the player to enter the ball in the first start area where the gaming state is in the first state and the ball fired to the left of the gaming board is likely to enter the ball. Instead, when there is a possibility that the game ball is being fired toward the right of the game board, it is possible to cause the player to shoot the ball toward the left of the game board. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enjoy the game in an advantageous state.

  In addition, since it is notified that the player is directed to shoot the ball toward the left side of the game board only after a ball having a predetermined number of balls of 2 balls or more passes through the second passing means for a predetermined time, Even though the player shoots the ball to the left of the game board, some balls flow down the right of the game board, so that the ball passes the second passing means It is possible to suppress the frequent occurrence of a notification for instructing the player to shoot the ball to the left of the game board. In addition, even if the player shoots a ball toward the right of the game board, the ball is only required to pass the ball having a predetermined number of balls greater than or equal to two for a predetermined time during the second passing means. It is possible to suppress the frequent occurrence of the notification by notifying the player to shoot toward the left of the game board. Therefore, the notification of the firing direction of the ball is appropriately performed, and the notification is frequently generated, so that it is possible to suppress that the interest in the game is disturbed.

  A gaming machine F1 according to any one of gaming machines A1 to A4 and B1 to B3, C1, D1, E1 and E2, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  A gaming machine F2 according to any one of gaming machines A1 to A4 and B1 to B3, C1, D1, E1 and E2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

A game machine F3 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines A1 to A4 and B1 to B3, C1, D1, E1 and E2, the game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, various effects images such as fluctuation effects are displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. The fluctuation effect is an effect started when the ball enters the ball entrance (starting opening) (start winning combination), and, for example, three or 3 × 3 grids horizontally or vertically in the effective display area A total of nine symbols etc. are displayed, and the symbols etc. displayed are scrolled based on predetermined game conditions, and when the scroll is stopped, the stop symbols become a predetermined combination at the predetermined stop position. In the case where there is a jackpot, the jackpot is generated (Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-272159).
In addition, during scrolls of symbols and the like, an entertaining effect (for example, an effect by reach display, etc.) is sometimes performed, which suggests in advance that a game state (for example, a big hit) advantageous to the player is obtained. It is also devised to give the player a sense of expectation for the game. Furthermore, in the effect by reach display, so-called double reach display is performed, not only to suggest that it will be a big hit, but by the stop symbol when the scroll is stopped, whether the probability of becoming a big hit will be high probability after big hit Some gaming machines are also used to produce effects that are expected to be negative.
In the conventional gaming machines, when reach display is performed, there are machines in which different reach voices are prepared depending on the symbols for which the reach display is established. In this type of gaming machine, when reach occurs in a plurality of symbols due to double reach display etc., reach voices corresponding to the respective symbols are output, but in consideration of the interest of the player, reach voices are It was not output.
The present technical concept is made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing voice output in consideration of a player's interest.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board 64 first ball entrance (first start area)
67 1st through gate (1st passage means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
110 Main control unit (main control means)
112a Ball Launch Unit (Ball Launch Device)
113 Voice lamp control device (part of sub control means, voice control means)
114 Display control device (part of sub control means, display control means)
223d5 Reach voice area (storage means)
226 Audio output device (audio output means)
640 2nd ball entrance (2nd starting area)
670 Second through gate (second passage means)
S1201, S1206 (detection means)
S1308 Variation start processing (determination means)
S1916 Sound reproduction setting process (output control means)
S2204 to S2207, S2210 (second detecting means)
S2208 (second notification means)
S2212 to S2215, S2218 (first detection means)
S2216 (first notification means)
S2305 (Stop means)
S2321 (Rewriting means)
S2334 (non-accepting means)
S2342: No (storage control means)
S2603 (notification means)

Claims (1)

The main control means which performs main control of the game, the sub control means which performs control based on the control signal from the main control means, and the fluctuation effect accompanied by the dynamic display of the identification information by the control of the sub control means And the voice output means for outputting voice, and the player is given a predetermined game value when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode by the change effect performed by the display means. In the game machine to be granted,
As an effect aspect of the fluctuation effect performed by the display means,
The first effect mode,
The second rendering mode,
Including a third effect mode simultaneously indicating the first effect mode and the second effect mode,
As the audio output by the audio output means,
A first sound output when the variation effect is performed in the first effect mode by the display means;
And a second sound output when the variation effect is performed in the second effect mode by the display means.
The sub-control means
Display control means for controlling display on the display means;
Audio control means for controlling the output of audio in the audio output means;
The display control means includes notification means for notifying the voice control means of the display content in the display means.
The notification means first notifies the voice control means of the second effect mode as the display content of the display means when the display means performs the variation effect in the third effect mode. And notifying the voice control means of the first effect mode.
The voice control means
An output control means for selecting a voice to be output based on the display contents in the display means notified by the notification means, and starting the output;
When the second effect mode is notified as the display content in the display means from the notification means, a notification of the first effect mode from the notification means and the predetermined period after the notification is received A gaming machine comprising: non-accepting means for making only a notification of the second effect mode unacceptable.

Images